2007 Buick Rendezvous

2007 Buick Rendezvous Owner Manual M
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7 Instrument Panel ....................................... 171

Front Seats .............................................. 9 Instrument Panel Overview ................... 174
Rear Seats ............................................. 15 Climate Controls ................................... 200
Safety Belts ............................................ 30 Warning Lights, Gages, and
Child Restraints ...................................... 57 Indicators .......................................... 211
Airbag System ........................................ 88 Message Center ................................... 225
Restraint System Check ....................... 104 Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 235
Audio System(s) ................................... 250
Features and Controls .............................. 107
Keys ..................................................... 109 Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 301
Doors and Locks .................................. 114 Your Driving, the Road, and
Windows ............................................... 120 Your Vehicle ..................................... 302
Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 122 Towing ................................................. 337
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 127 Service and Appearance Care .................. 351
Mirrors .................................................. 142 Service ................................................. 354
OnStar® System ................................... 144 Fuel ...................................................... 356
Universal Home Remote System .......... 147 Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 362
Storage Areas ...................................... 158 Bulb Replacement ................................ 399
Sunroof ................................................ 169 Windshield Replacement ....................... 404
1
Windshield Wiper Blade Maintenance Schedule .............................. 471
Replacement ..................................... 404 Maintenance Schedule .......................... 472
Tires ..................................................... 406
Appearance Care .................................. 451 Customer Assistance Information ............. 491
Vehicle Identification ............................. 461 Customer Assistance and Information ... 492
Electrical System .................................. 462 Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 508
Capacities and Specifications ................ 469 Index .......................................................... 513
2
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
BUICK, the BUICK Emblem, and the name vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
RENDEZVOUS are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation. Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at the
A French language copy of this manual can be
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
obtained from your dealer or from:
make changes after that time without notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the Helm, Incorporated
name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this Detroit, MI 48207
manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15860822 A First Printing 2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from {CAUTION:
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn These mean there is something that could
about the features and controls for the vehicle. hurt you or other people.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
Index reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
A good place to quickly locate information about you do not, you or others could be hurt.
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual You will also find a
and the page number where it can be found. circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
Safety Warnings and Symbols means “Do Not,” “Do
There are a number of safety cautions in this Not do this” or “Do Not
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to let this happen.”
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
Notice: These mean there is something with the text describing the operation or
that could damage your vehicle. information relating to a specific component,
A notice tells about something that can damage control, message, gage, or indicator.
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could component, gage, or indicator, reference the
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help following topics:
avoid the damage.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors • Features and Controls in Section 2
or in different words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They • Climate Controls in Section 3
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. • Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9 Right Front Passenger Position ................... 46
Manual Seats ................................................ 9 Rear Outside Passenger Positions .............. 47
Power Seats ............................................... 10 Center Rear Passenger Position .................. 51
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 53
Heated Seats .............................................. 11 Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 56
Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 11 Safety Belt Extender ................................... 56
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 13 Child Restraints ............................................ 57
Head Restraints .......................................... 15 Older Children ............................................. 57
Rear Seats .................................................... 15 Infants and Young Children ......................... 60
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 15 Child Restraint Systems .............................. 64
Split Bench Seats ....................................... 15 Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 68
Captain Chairs ............................................ 21 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Stowable Seat ............................................. 26 Children (LATCH) .................................... 69
Safety Belts .................................................. 30 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 30 Outside Seat Position .............................. 79
Questions and Answers About Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Safety Belts ............................................. 34 Rear Seat Position ................................... 82
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 35 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Driver Position ............................................. 36 Front Seat Position .................................. 84
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 45
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 46
7
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 88 Passenger Sensing System ......................... 98
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 91 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 102
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 93 Adding Equipment to Your
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 95 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 103
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 96 Restraint System Check ............................. 104
What Will You See After an Airbag Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 104
Inflates? ................................................... 96 Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 105
8
Front Seats Use the lever located
under the front of the
seat to adjust the
Manual Seats seat forward or
rearward.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do Pull the lever up to unlock the seat. Slide the seat
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only to where you want it and release the lever. To
when the vehicle is not moving. make sure the seat is locked into place, try
to move the seat back and forth with your body.
Your vehicle may have manual seats.
9
Power Seats Manual Lumbar
If the vehicle has power The knob that controls
seats, the controls used this feature is located
to operate them are on the outboard sides of
located on the outboard the driver’s and front
side of the seats. passenger’s seats.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following: Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding increase lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the
the control forward or rearward. rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the control up
or down.
10
Heated Seats Memory Seat and Mirrors
Your vehicle may have If your vehicle has this
heated seats. If it does, feature, the controls are
the heated seat located on the driver’s
switches are located in door panel and are used
the instrument panel to store and recall the
switchbank. driver’s seat position
and the outside rearview
mirror position.
This feature will quickly heat the seat cushions
and lower back of the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat. The left switch is for the driver’s
seat and the right switch is for the front The settings for these features can be
passenger’s seat. personalized for both driver 1 and driver 2.
Press the top of the switch to turn the heater on. Driver 1 and driver 2 correspond to the memory
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the buttons labeled 1 and 2 on the driver’s door and to
heater off. The heated seat switch will turn off the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remote
when the ignition is turned to OFF and will resume keyless entry transmitters.
operation when the ignition is turned to ON,
unless the switch is turned off.
11
To store the memory settings, do the following: To store an exit position for each driver, do the
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and the outside following:
rearview mirrors to the position you would like 1. Move the seat to the desired exit position.
for driving. 2. Hold the button with the exit symbol, located
2. Press and hold memory button 1 for more below the memory buttons, for more than
than three seconds. three seconds.
A double beep will sound when the memory seat The exit position stored will be for the most
and mirror position have been stored. recently selected driving position (1 or 2). A double
To store the seat and outside rearview mirror beep will sound when the exit position is stored.
positions for a second driver, follow the previous To use the exit feature, your vehicle must be
steps, but press button 2 instead. in PARK (P). Press and release the button with
To recall your stored positions, your vehicle must the exit symbol and the seat will move to the exit
be in PARK (P). Press and release the memory position stored for the most recently selected
button (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired driving driver. You will hear one beep.
position. The seat and the outside rearview To stop recall movement of the seat at any time,
mirrors will move to the position previously stored press one of the three memory buttons or one
for the identified driver. You will hear one beep. of the power seat controls located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), you can use it to
program certain functions of the memory seats.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 240.
12
Reclining Seatbacks Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The
lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seats.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If the seatback is not locked, it could 2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. then release the lever to lock the seatback
That could cause injury to the person in place.
sitting there. Always push and pull on the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
seatback to be sure it is locked. is locked.
13
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
Sitting in a reclined position when your
the upright position.
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
is locked. cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.
14
Head Restraints Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have seat operating
features to adjust, fold, remove and reinstall the
seats. By using the seat operating procedures, in
the correct order, you can easily remove the
seats from your vehicle.
When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be
sure to follow the label on the back of the seat for
proper location.
Split Bench Seats

If your vehicle has the split bench seat, the
seatbacks can be folded forward or reclined
individually and the sections can be flipped forward
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the or removed individually.
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up or push it down to
adjust it.
15
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks To recline the seatback
on up-level split bench
seats, push forward
{CAUTION: on the recliner lever,
located on the outboard
side of the seatback,
If the seatback is not locked, it could to release the seatback.
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. Move the seatback to
That could cause injury to the person the desired position and
sitting there. Always push and pull on the release the lever.
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Up-Level
To recline the seatback
on base-level split It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you
bench seats, lift lean forward and take the weight off the seatback.
the recliner lever,
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
located on the outboard
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
side of the seatback,
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
to release the seatback.
the safety belts and return them to their normal
Move the seatback to
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
the desired position.
The seatbacks also fold forward. Lift or push the
recliner lever forward, depending on the model,
Base-Level
and fold the seatback forward.
16
The seatback will lock into place when you push it Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
back to the upright position. After raising a belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seatback to an upright position, push and pull on seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the seatback to make sure that it is locked in the safety belts and return them to their normal
place. stowed position before folding a rear seat.
3. Lift up or push forward on the seatback
Removing the Split Bench Seat recliner lever to fold the seatback forward.
Each section of the split bench seat can be flipped
forward or removed individually.
Base-Level
4. For base-level split bench seats, pull the lever
1. Unlatch the shoulder belt from the lap-belt. at the base of the seat on the outboard side
2. Make sure that the seatback is in the upright to release the rear latches from the floor
position. pins and flip the seat forward.
17
For up-level split bench
seats, continue pushing
forward on the recliner
lever to release the
rear latches from
the floor pins and flip
the seat forward.
5. To release the front latches, squeeze the

angled latch release bar toward the straight
crossbar.
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward
the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.
18
Replacing the Split Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
If the seatback is not locked, it could
provide the protection needed in a crash.
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
That could cause injury to the person
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
{CAUTION: Make sure that the seatback is in the folded

forward position and that the safety belts are on
A seat that is not locked into place the correct section of the seat.
properly can move around in a collision or Do not put the sections of the bench seat in so
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could that they face rearward because they will not latch
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into that way.
place properly when installing it.
19
The split bench seat sections have seat position 2. Make sure that the
labels, located on the back of each section, bench seat is angled
showing where the section must go. so that the front
The seat must be placed in the proper location for hooks clear the floor
the legs to attach correctly. pins. If the front
legs are not
attached correctly,
the rear legs will not
attach to the rear
set of floor pins.
1. Squeeze the angled latch release bar toward

the straight crossbar while placing the front
hooks of the bench seat onto the front
two floor pins.
20
Captain Chairs
If your vehicle has captain chairs in the second
row, the seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
and the seatbacks can be folded forward or
reclined.
Adjusting the Captain Chairs Forward
and Rearward
To adjust the captain chairs, use the adjustment
bar located below the front of each seat.
Lift the lever to slide the seat forward or rearward.
Release the lever. Try to move the seat to
3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor make sure it is locked into place.
pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is
locked down.
5. Lift the seatback recliner lever and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked upright.
7. Attach the lap belt.
21
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
To recline the seatback, lift the recliner lever

located on the outboard side of the seatback.
Release the lever when the seatback is in
the desired position.
22
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety Removing the Captain Chairs
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
the safety belts and return them to their normal belts still fastened may cause damage to the
stowed position before folding a rear seat. seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
To fold the seatback forward, lift the recliner lever, stowed position before folding a rear seat.
located on the outboard side of the seatback,
fully without applying pressure to the seatback. 1. Lift the seatback recliner lever to fold
the seatback forward.
To return the seatback to the upright position, lift
the recliner lever and move the seatback until
it locks in the upright position, Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it locked in place.
2. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to

release the rear hooks from the floor pins.
23
Installing the Captain Chairs
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
3. The seat can then be lifted off the front
floor pins.
4. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward
the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
24
Do not put the seats in so that they face rearward
because they will not latch that way. The captain
chairs have seat position labels, located on
the back of each seat, showing where that seat
must go. The seat must be placed in the
proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
1. Make sure that the seatback is in the folded
forward position and that the safety belts are
on the correct side of the seat.
2. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.
25
4. Push and pull on the seat to check that it is
properly attached.
{CAUTION:
5. Return the seatback to the upright position.

3. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the
rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
Stowable Seat
The stowable seat is a two passenger bench seat
{CAUTION: that comes with the rear convenience center.
See Rear Convenience Center on page 165. The
A seat that is not locked into place stowable seat can be removed or, with the
properly can move around in a collision or seatback folded, lie flat with the convenience
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could center.
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
26
Folding the Seatback To raise the seatback, do one of the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety

• From the rear of the vehicle, lift the lever
belts still fastened may cause damage to the to release the seatback. Then pull the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle strap, located on the right side of the seat, to
the safety belts and return them to their normal lift the seatback up. The seatback has a
stowed position before folding a rear seat. pocket on the side to stow the strap.
• From the passenger’s side door, lift the lever
To fold the seatback to release the seatback. Lift the seatback
forward, lift the lever and push it until it locks in place.
located on the back of
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
the seat. Push the
is locked into place.
seatback down until it is
locked into place.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it

is locked into place.
27
Removing the Stowable Seat Installing the Stowable Seat
1. Remove the convenience center, if it is in the
vehicle. See Rear Convenience Center on
page 165. {CAUTION:
2. Make sure all items are off the stowable seat.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
3. From the front of the seat, remove the properly attached, or twisted will not
two nuts, located on the floor on each side of provide the protection needed in a crash.
the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety seriously injured. After installing the seat,
belts still fastened may cause damage to the always check to be sure that the safety
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle belts are properly routed and attached,
the safety belts and return them to their normal and are not twisted.
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
4. From behind the bench seat, fold the seatback
down. See “Folding the Seatback” previously. Do not put the stowable seat in so that it faces
rearward. The stowable seat has to be installed
5. Remove the rear nuts located on the floor on before the rear convenience center. See Rear
each side of the seat. Convenience Center on page 165 for more
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward information.
the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out
the vehicle. This should be done in one
motion.
7. Put the nuts back onto the screws so the nuts
do not get misplaced.
28
The stowable seat has seat position labels,
located on the back of the seat, showing where
the seat must go. The seat must be placed in the {CAUTION:
proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
A seat that is not locked into place
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
stowed position before folding a rear seat. place properly when installing it.
1. Make sure that the seatback is folded forward
before beginning this procedure. See “Folding 5. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
the Seatback” previously. locked into place.
2. Remove the nuts from the screws.
3. Place the stowable seat on the vehicle floor {CAUTION:
so that the seat brackets are placed over the
screws.
4. Reinstall the nuts onto the screws. Torque to move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
approximately 18 lb ft (25 Y). That could cause injury to the person
6. Raise the seatback to its upright position.

Push and pull on the seatback to make
sure that it is locked into place.
29
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
This part of the manual tells you how to use cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things In a collision, people riding in these areas
you should not do with safety belts.
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
{CAUTION: area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
using a safety belt properly.
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much Your vehicle has a light
worse. You can hit things inside the that comes on as a
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be reminder to buckle up.
seriously injured or killed. In the same See Safety Belt
crash, you might not be, if you are Reminder Light on
buckled up. Always fasten your safety page 215.
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too. In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
30
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do Why Safety Belts Work
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one. When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a

seat on wheels.
31
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
32
The person keeps going until stopped by or the instrument panel...
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
33
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an

accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I

have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle in most of them in the future. But they are
does. You get more time to stop. You stop supplemental systems only; so they work with
over more distance, and your strongest bones safety belts — not instead of them. Every
take the forces. That is why safety belts airbag system ever offered for sale has
make such good sense. required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have
to buckle up to get the most protection. That
is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
34
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are Be aware that there are special things to know
in an accident — even one that is not your about safety belts and children. And there
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. are different rules for smaller children and babies.
Being a good driver does not protect you If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
from things beyond your control, such as bad Older Children on page 57 or Infants and Young
drivers. Children on page 60. Follow those rules for
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) everyone’s protection.
of home. And the greatest number of First, you will want to know which restraint
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of systems your vehicle has.
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
35
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
36
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it 5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
clicks. height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 45.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,

tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is 6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
secure. If the belt is not long enough, shoulder belt.
see Safety Belt Extender on page 56. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
Make sure the release button on the buckle is safety belt through the latch plate to fully
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
37
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
38
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

nearly as much protection this way.
39
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.
40
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
41
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the
belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
42
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It

should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.
43
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your dealer
to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
44
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, push

down on the button (A)
and move the height
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. adjuster to the desired
The belt should go back out of the way. position. You can
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out move the height
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can adjuster up by pushing
damage both the belt and your vehicle. up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you

want it, try to move it down without pushing
the button down to make sure it has locked into
position.
45
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
to be seriously injured if they do not wear the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
safety belts. them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 36.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder

belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
46
Rear Outside Passenger Positions Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers The positions next to the windows have
to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear a
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in lap-shoulder belt properly.
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
47
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the

buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, shoulder part.
tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 56. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if you ever had to.
48
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
49
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
50
Center Rear Passenger Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit
in the center position.
When you sit in the center seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. You
also have a shoulder belt, which has a retractor.
In order to have the protection of the shoulder belt,
you must first connect it to the lap belt.
1. Remove the shoulder belt from its stowage

location in the roof and pull it all the way
down to the lap belt.
51
2. Insert the metal knob on the shoulder belt into 3. To make the lap belt longer, tilt the latch plate
the keyhole on the lap belt buckle as shown. and pull it along the belt.
Be sure to slide the shoulder belt part into
the keyhole until it locks into place.
52
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is a guide available for the center passenger
position in the second row rear seat. Here is
how to install the comfort guide to the safety belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as

shown until the belt is snug
4. Buckle, position and release the lap-shoulder
belt the same way as the other lap-shoulder
belts. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 56.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
53
For second row center position do the following:
2. Attach the elastic cord to the comfort guide on

Second Row Center Position the center passenger shoulder belt.
1. Remove the elastic cord from under the head
restraint of the second row, driver’s side
position.
54
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The guide must be on top of the belt.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt

as described in Center Rear Passenger
Position on page 51. Make sure that the
shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the elastic cord, remove it
from the comfort guide. The elastic cord will
go back under the head restraint.
55
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
driver and right front passenger. Although you you should use it.
cannot see them, they are located on the retractor But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
part of the safety belts. They help the safety will order you an extender. When you go in to order
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash. extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
crash, you will need to get new ones, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
probably other new parts for your safety belt has been designed for adults. Never use it for
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the
After a Crash on page 105. regular safety belt. For more information see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
56
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
Older Children and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
57
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 53. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
58
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
59
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This {CAUTION:
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the Children can be seriously injured or
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state around their neck and the safety belt
in the United States and in every Canadian continues to tighten. Never leave children
province says children up to some age must be unattended in a vehicle and never allow
restrained while in a vehicle.
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in

vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
60
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
61
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
62
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When CAUTION: (Continued)
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, strongest part of an infant’s body, the back
the restraint will have a label saying that it and shoulders. Infants always should be
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. secured in appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints {CAUTION:
available for children with special needs.
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
{CAUTION: for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
Newborn infants need complete support, that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
including support for the head and neck. not remain low on the hip bones, as it
This is necessary because a newborn should. Instead, it may settle up around
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
so much compared with the rest of its would apply force on a body area that is
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing unprotected by any bony structure. This
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
forces can be distributed across the Young children always should be secured
CAUTION: (Continued) in appropriate child restraints.
63
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with

the seating surface against the back of the
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use infant. The harness system holds the infant in
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
designed to restrain or position a child on a positioned in the restraint.
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
64
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
for the child’s body with the harness and also to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
or shelf-like shields. positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
65
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint? Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
A: A child restraint system is any device designed the Vehicle
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor {CAUTION:
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the A child can be seriously injured or killed
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an in a crash if the child restraint is not
add-on child restraint must be secured in properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child the child restraint is properly installed in
restraints, the child has to be secured within the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
the child restraint. or LATCH system, following the
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be instructions that came with that restraint,
sure the child restraint is designed to be and also the instructions in this manual.
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
safety standards. Then follow the instructions restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
for the restraint. You may find these restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
instructions on the restraint itself or in a by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
booklet, or both. belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 69 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
66
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the instructions that come with the restraint which the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
and to this manual. The child restraint instructions that swings up or to the side.
are important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can {CAUTION:
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly A child can be seriously injured or killed
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even in a crash if the child is not properly
when no child is in it. secured in the child restraint. Make sure
Securing the Child Within the Child the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
Restraint restraint.
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down Because there are different systems, it is important
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle to refer to the instructions that come with the
together at the crotch. The five-point harness restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and the child is not properly secured in the child
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip restraint.
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
67
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front Even though the passenger sensing
seat. We recommend that child restraints be system is designed to turn off the
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding system is fail-safe, and no one can
in a booster seat. guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate under some unusual circumstance, even
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun though it is turned off. We recommend
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
{CAUTION: far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is secure the child restraint properly.
because the back of the rear-facing child Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
restraint would be very close to the move around in a collision or sudden stop and
inflating airbag.
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
CAUTION: (Continued) secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
68
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
Children (LATCH) tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during Lower Anchors
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
you need a child restraint that has LATCH LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will child restraint with lower attachments (B).
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
69
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child child restraints. Ask the child restraint
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
70
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor i (Top Tether Anchor):
Locations Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with j (Lower Anchor):
top tether anchors. Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Second Row —
Bench Seat
Second Row —
Captains Chairs
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Third Row
71
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has two
labels, near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating

the top tether anchors,
look for this symbol.
Second Row — Captains Chairs
For the third row, the top tether anchor symbol is For second row captains chairs, the top tether
located on the flap of carpet behind the seat. anchors are exposed and located at the rear of the
Lift the carpet to access the anchor. seat cushions. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
For the second row center seating position in a position where the child restraint will be placed.
vehicle that has the extended rear convenience
center, the top tether anchor symbol is located on
the cover of the convenience center. Lift the
cover to access the top tether anchor.
72
Second Row Outside Position Bench Seat Second Row Center Position Bench Seat without
Third Row Seat
For second row outboard seating positions, the
top tether anchors are exposed and located at the The anchor for the center position bench seat is
rear of the seat cushions. Be sure to use an located on the floor behind the second row
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as seats. If the vehicle has the extended rear
the seating position where the child restraint convenience center, you need to lift the cover of
will be placed. the convenience center to access the anchor
for the center position bench seat.
73
Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with Second Row Center Position Bench Seat with
Third Row Seat Third Row Seat Folded Down
If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback If the vehicle has a third row seat and the seatback
is upright, there is an anchor strap located is folded down, there is an anchor on the back
between the third row seatback and cushion to of the third row seat for the second row center
anchor the child restraint for the second row center position bench seat.
position bench seat. If you are using a child restraint with a top tether in
the second row center bench seat and need to
temporarily transport a flat tire for repair, move the
child restraint to a rear seat outboard position.
74
See Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
Seat Position on page 79 for more information passenger’s position or in the third row driver side
including important safety information. position, if your vehicle has one, if a national or
local law requires that the top tether be attached,
or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
There is no place to attach the top tether in
this position.
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 68
for additional information.
Third Row
If the vehicle has a third row, there is a top tether
anchor for the third row passenger’s side
position. Locate the anchor symbol on the flap of
carpet behind the seat. Lift up the carpet to
access the anchor.
75
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System {CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not child restraint. Attaching more than one
attached to anchors, the restraint will not child restraint to a single anchor could
be able to protect the child correctly. In a cause the anchor or attachment to come
crash, the child could be seriously injured loose or even break during a crash. A
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child or others could be injured if this
child restraint is properly installed using happens. To help prevent injury to people
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety and damage to your vehicle, attach only
belts to secure the restraint, following the one child restraint per anchor.
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
76
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
{CAUTION: belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
Children can be seriously injured or belts to their normal, stowed position before
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped folding the rear seat.
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
safety belts behind the child restraint so
not have lower attachments or the desired
children cannot reach them. Pull the seating position does not have lower anchors,
shoulder belt all the way out of the secure the child restraint with the top tether
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle and the safety belts. Refer to your child
has one, after the child restraint has been restraint manufacturer instructions and the
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions in this manual.
instructions of the child restraint 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
manufacturer. seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s attachments on the child restraint to the
safety belt assembly may cause damage to lower anchors.
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
77
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends 2.5. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
that the top tether be attached, attach and according to your child restraint
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, instructions and the following
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions:
instructions and the following steps: If the position you are
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. using does not have a
2.2. If you have an adjustable head restraint, head restraint and
raise the head restraint. you are using a single
tether, route the
2.3. If the vehicle has the extended rear tether over the
convenience center, you need to lift the seatback.
cover of the convenience center to
access the anchor for the second row
center position bench seat.
2.4. For the third row bench seat, lift the
carpet to expose the anchor. If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
78
If the position you are Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
using has an adjustable
head restraint and Outside Seat Position
you are using a dual If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
tether, route the Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
tether around the head (LATCH) on page 69.
restraint.
There is no top tether anchor in the third row
driver’s-side position. Do not secure a child seat in
this position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say
If the position you are
that the top tether must be anchored. See
using has an adjustable
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
head restraint and you
on page 69 if the child restraint has a top
are using a single tether,
tether.
route the tether under
the head restraint and in If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
between the head system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
restraint posts. belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.
79
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button

is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
80
5. If your child restraint has a top tether and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 69.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt larger child passenger.
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
81
Securing a Child Restraint in the Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
Center Rear Seat Position restraint when and as the instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 69.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in the center rear
seating position.
To secure a child restraint in this position, you will
use only the lap part of the belt. Disconnect the
shoulder part of the belt and store it before
securing child restraint. See Center Rear
Passenger Position on page 51.
If you are using a top tether-equipped child
restraint in the center rear seat and need to
temporarily transport a flat tire for repair, move the
child restraint to a rear seat outboard position. 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting
See Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
Seat Position on page 79 for more on this,
including important safety information. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
82
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach
and tighten the top tether to the top tether
anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and to step five
under Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 69.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. When you
remove the child restraint, be sure to reconnect the
lap and shoulder parts of the belt so they will be
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ready to work for an adult or larger child
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you
push down on the child restraint. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
83
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position {CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A
rear seat is a safer place to secure a A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
the Restraint on page 68. because the back of the rear-facing child
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger restraint would be very close to the
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is inflating airbag.
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s Even though the passenger sensing
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant system is designed to turn off the right
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
restraint or booster seat is detected. See system detects a rear-facing child
Passenger Sensing System on page 98 and restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 217 for one can guarantee that an airbag will not
more information on this including important deploy under some unusual circumstance,
safety information. even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a restraints be secured in the rear seat,
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because even if the airbag is off.
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
84
If you need to secure a forward-facing child Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
restraint in the right front seat position, move the the instructions say.
seat as far back as it will go before securing 1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10. System on page 98. General Motors
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see recommends that rear-facing child restraints
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
(LATCH) on page 69. off. If your child restraint is forward-facing,
There is no top tether anchor at the right front move the seat as far back as it will go before
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this securing the child restraint in this seat.
position if a national or local law requires that See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions on page 10.
that come with the child restraint say that the top When the passenger sensing system has
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 69 if airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
the child restraint has a top tether. status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to ON or START.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow on page 217.
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
85
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way

out of the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button

is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
86
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system and the airbag is off, the off indicator
will be lit and stay lit in the inside rearview
mirror when the key is turned to ON or
START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
If you are using a forward-facing child adjust the head restraint.
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
knee to push down on the child restraint child restraint in a rear seat position in the
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able vehicle and check with your dealer.
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different The safety belt will move freely again and be
directions to be sure it is secure. ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
87
Airbag System Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags. {CAUTION:
Side impact airbags are available for the driver and
right front passenger. You can be severely injured or killed in a
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the crash if you are not wearing your safety
driver and/or the right front passenger, the word belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the your safety belt during a crash helps
side of the seatback closest to the door. reduce your chance of hitting things
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
risk of injury from the force of an inflating Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very the safety belts. All airbags are designed
quickly to do their job and comply with federal to work with safety belts but do not
regulations. replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
88
{CAUTION:
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained Both frontal and side impact airbags
occupants, frontal airbags may provide inflate with great force, faster than the
less protection in frontal crashes than blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
more forceful airbags have provided in inflating airbag, as you would be if you
the past. were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
Side impact airbags are designed to position for airbag inflation before and
inflate in moderate to severe crashes during a crash. Always wear your safety
where something hits the side of your belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in should sit as far back as possible while
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes. still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a Front occupants should not lean on or
safety belt properly — whether or not sleep against the door.
there is an airbag for that person.
89
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
{CAUTION: instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
Anyone who is up against, or very close airbag symbol.
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young The system checks the airbag electrical system for
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
safety belt system nor its airbag system is electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
designed for them. Young children and page 215 for more information.
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 57 or Infants and Young Children on
page 60.
90
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the

instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
91
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s
airbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest side impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
to the door. seatback closest to the door.
92
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION: The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
If something is between an occupant and severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
properly or it might force the object into predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
that person causing severe injury or even thresholds take into account a variety of desired
death. The path of an inflating airbag must deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
be kept clear. Do not put anything
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
between an occupant and an airbag, and occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
do not attach or put anything on the should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
steering wheel hub or on or near any is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
other airbag covering. Do not let seat direction of the impact, and how quickly your
covers block the inflation path of a side vehicle slows down.
impact airbag.
93
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
airbags, which adjust the restraint according speeds. For example:
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
frontal sensors which help the sensing system airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
distinguish between a moderate and a more than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less than • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
full deployment. For more severe frontal airbags could inflate at a different crash
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not does not deform.
move or deform, the threshold level for the • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
reduced deployment is about 12 to 20 mph the airbags could inflate at a different crash
(19 to 33 km/h), and the threshold level for a full speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
deployment is about 21 to 25 mph (34 to 40 km/h). (like a wall).
The threshold level can vary, however, with • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat the airbags could inflate at a different crash
above or below this range. speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
94
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
airbags. See Airbag System on page 88 for more
information. Side impact airbags are intended In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A sensing system detects that the vehicle is
side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
is above the system’s designed “threshold of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not hardware are all part of the airbag modules.
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, Frontal airbag modules are located inside
rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag the steering wheel and instrument panel. For
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that seating positions with side impact airbags, there
is struck. are also airbag modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of the
impact.
95
How Does an Airbag Restrain? What Will You See After an Airbag
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal Inflates?
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In quickly that some people may not even realize the
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
Airbags supplement the protection provided frontal airbag, the instrument panel for the
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, and for
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper seating positions with side impact airbags, the side
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But of the seatback closest to the door — may be
the frontal airbags would not help you in many hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag that
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear come into contact with you may be warm, but
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
Side impact airbags would not help you in many airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
types of collisions, including many frontal or from seeing out of the windshield or being able
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts. to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
Airbags should never be regarded as anything from leaving the vehicle.
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
96
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
{CAUTION: deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger
When an airbag inflates, there may be airbag.
dust in the air. This dust could cause • Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
breathing problems for people with a After they inflate, you will need some new
history of asthma or other breathing parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the them, the airbag system will not be there to
vehicle should get out as soon as it is help protect you in another crash. A new
safe to do so. If you have breathing system will include airbag modules and
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle possibly other parts. The service manual for
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air your vehicle covers the need to replace
by opening a window or a door. If you other parts.
experience breathing problems following • Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
an airbag deployment, you should seek diagnostic module which records information
medical attention. after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 503.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically airbag system. Improper service can mean
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on that an airbag system will not work properly.
when the airbags inflate and turn on the hazard See your dealer for service.
warning flashers. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers on by using the controls for those
features.
97
Passenger Sensing System The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check.
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. When the system check is complete, either the
The passenger airbag status indicator in the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
rearview mirror will be visible when you turn your the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
ignition key to ON or START. Airbag Status Indicator on page 217.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed
United States
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. General Motors recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
Canada riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
98
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun CAUTION: (Continued)
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the even though it is turned off. We
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If you need to secure a forward-facing
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can child restraint in the right front seat,
be seriously injured or killed if the right always move the front passenger seat as
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is far back as it will go. It is better to secure
because the back of the rear-facing child the child restraint in a rear seat.
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
Even though the passenger sensing off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
system is designed to turn off the • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system • The system determines that an infant is
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no present in a rear-facing infant seat.
system is fail-safe, and no one can
• The system determines that a small child is
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
under some unusual circumstance,
• The system determines that a small child is
CAUTION: (Continued) present in a booster seat.
99
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
of the seat for a period of time. under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by adjust the head restraint.
a smaller person, such as a child who has If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
outgrown child restraints. child restraint in a rear seat position in the
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag vehicle and check with your dealer.
system or the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
When the passenger sensing system has turned enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator frontal airbag anytime the system senses
will light and stay lit to remind you that the that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
airbag is off. right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
If a child restraint has been installed and the on enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child remind you that the airbag is active.
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s For some children who have outgrown child
directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
the Right Front Seat Position on page 84. sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not child restraints should wear a safety belt
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s that person.
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
100
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could
be because that person is not sitting properly in the {CAUTION:
seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright If the airbag readiness light in the
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the instrument panel cluster ever comes on
seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably and stays on, it means that something
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person may be wrong with the airbag system. If
remain in this position for about two minutes. This this ever happens, have the vehicle
will allow the system to detect that person and then serviced promptly, because an adult-size
enable the passenger’s airbag. person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 215 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
101
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can You do not want the system to inflate while
affect how well the passenger sensing system someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
operates. You may want to consider not using seat and the service manual have information about
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See purchase a service manual, see Service
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Publications Ordering Information on page 510.
Vehicle on page 103 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates. {CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key
{CAUTION: is turned off and the battery is
disconnected, an airbag can still inflate
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s during improper service. You can be
seat or between the passenger’s seat injured if you are close to an airbag when
cushion and seatback may interfere with it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
the proper operation of the passenger are probably part of the airbag system. Be
sensing system. sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle The airbag system does not need regular
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be maintenance.
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle.
102
Adding Equipment to Your Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
airbags from working properly? and diagnostic module, the inside rearview
mirror, steering wheel, or airbag wiring
A: Yes. If you add things that change your can affect the operation of the airbag system.
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, If you have questions, call Customer
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep Assistance. The phone numbers and
the airbag system from working properly. addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Also, the airbag system may not work properly Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If Procedure in this manual. See Customer
you have any questions about this, you should Satisfaction Procedure on page 492.
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 492.
103
Restraint System Check Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on a
Checking the Restraint Systems seatback, the airbag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module in
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
the steering wheel, both the airbag module
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
and the instrument panel for the right
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both the
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
airbag module and the seatback for seating
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
positions with a side impact airbag
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
(if equipped.) Do not open or break the airbag
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 455.
coverings.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a
belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
104
Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
After a Crash have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
{CAUTION: was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
A crash can damage the restraint systems system parts. See the part on the airbag system
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint earlier in this section.
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
or even death in a crash. To help make replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
sure your restraint systems are working retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
properly after a crash, have them new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
inspected and any necessary you in a collision.
replacements made as soon as possible. After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
LATCH system parts? deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
After a very minor collision, nothing may be pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
would be if worn during a more severe crash, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
then you need new parts. start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
If the LATCH system was being used during a Airbag Readiness Light on page 215.
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
105
✍ NOTES
106
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 109 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 127
Remote Keyless Entry System .................. 110 New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 127
Remote Keyless Entry System Ignition Positions ....................................... 128
Operation ............................................... 111 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 129
Doors and Locks ........................................ 114 Starting the Engine .................................... 129
Door Locks ................................................ 114 Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 131
Power Door Locks ..................................... 115 Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 132
Delayed Locking ........................................ 116 Parking Brake ........................................... 135
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 116 Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 136
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 116 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 138
Lockout Protection ..................................... 118 Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 139
Liftgate ...................................................... 118 Engine Exhaust ......................................... 140
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 141
Windows ...................................................... 120
Power Windows ........................................ 121 Mirrors ......................................................... 142
Sun Visors ................................................ 122 Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 142
Outside Power Mirror ................................ 142
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 122 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 143
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 122 Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 143
PASS-Key® III ........................................... 124 Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 143
PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 125
OnStar® System .......................................... 144
107
Section 2 Features and Controls
Universal Home Remote System ................ 147 Storage Areas ............................................. 158
Universal Home Remote System Glove Box ................................................. 158
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 147 Cupholder(s) .............................................. 158
Universal Home Remote System Cell Phone Storage Area ........................... 159
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 148 Overhead Console ..................................... 159
Universal Home Remote System Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 160
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 149 Front Armrest Storage Area ....................... 160
Universal Home Remote System Operation Rear Storage Area .................................... 160
(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 154 Roof Rack System .................................... 161
Convenience Net ....................................... 164
Cargo Cover ............................................. 165
Rear Convenience Center ......................... 165
Sunroof ....................................................... 169
108
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
Your vehicle’s key can be used for the ignition as

well as the driver’s door lock, the floor console, and
the glove box. If you need a new key, contact your
dealer, who can obtain the correct key code.
109
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft Remote Keyless Entry System
system. The key has a transponder in the key
head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
steering column. If a replacement key or system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
any additional key is needed, you must purchase to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
this key from your dealer. The key will have Rules and with Industry Canada.
PK3® stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
came with the original keys. Give this tag to Rules. Operation is subject to the following
your dealer if you need a new key made. two conditions:
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed 1. This device may not cause interference.
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key®
III on page 124 for more information on 2. This device must accept any interference
programming your new key. received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
conditions:
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, see 1. This device may not cause interference.
Roadside Assistance Program on page 498 for
more information. 2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
110
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This Remote Keyless Entry System
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer Operation
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
With this feature, you
• Check the distance. You may be too far can lock and unlock
from your vehicle. You may need to stand your doors using
closer during rainy or snowy weather. the remote keyless
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects entry transmitter
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps supplied with your
to the left or right, hold the transmitter vehicle.
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 111.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
UNLOCK: Press UNLOCK to unlock only the
or a qualified technician for service.
driver’s door. If you press UNLOCK again within
five seconds, the passengers’ doors and the
liftgate will unlock. See “Liftgate Release” under
Liftgate on page 118 for more information.
The UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 122
for more information.
111
If you would like to program the way the Matching Transmitter(s) to
headlamps and parking lamps operate with remote Your Vehicle
unlock confirmation, and your vehicle is equipped
with the Driver Information Center (DIC), see Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 240. prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK. replacement can be purchased through your
The LOCK button on the remote keyless entry dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitter will arm the content theft-deterrent transmitters with you when you go to your dealer.
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 122 When the dealer matches the replacement
for more information. transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
If you would like to program the way the dealer has coded the new transmitter, the
headlamps, parking lamps, horn, and radio operate lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each
with remote lock confirmation, and your vehicle is vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
equipped with the Driver Information Center (DIC), matched to it.
see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 240.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another
REAR: To unlock the liftgate, press REAR. See vehicle.
Liftgate on page 118 for more information.
L (Remote Alarm): Press the button with the
horn symbol to make the headlamps and parking
lamps flash and the horn sound. This will allow
you to attract attention, if needed. Press the button
with the horn symbol again to stop the alarm
from sounding, or the alarm will turn off after
90 seconds.
112
Battery Replacement Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
Under normal use, the battery in your remote from your body transferred to these surfaces
keyless entry transmitter should last about may damage the transmitter.
three years.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the
slot on the side of the transmitter and twist
to separate the halves.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.
Do not use the metal flanges to remove the
battery.
3. Replace the battery.
United States Canada
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the
You can tell the battery is weak if the KEY FOB halves are snapped together tightly so water
BATTERY LOW message appears in the message will not get in.
center. If you get this message, the battery in 5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
the key fob needs to be replaced. buttons for seven seconds to synchronize
the transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
113
Doors and Locks
Door Locks • Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
{CAUTION: heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Always lock your vehicle whenever
• Passengers, especially children, can you leave it.
easily open the doors and fall out of a • Outsiders can easily enter through an
moving vehicle. When a door is unlocked door when you slow down
locked, the handle will not open it. or stop your vehicle. Locking your
You increase the chance of being doors can help prevent this from
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if happening.
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the There are several ways to lock and unlock your
doors whenever you drive. vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued) From the outside, use your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
114
To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with Power Door Locks
the key, insert the key and turn it toward the
front of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from The power door lock
the outside with your key, insert the key and switch is located on the
turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. driver’s and front
passenger’s doors next
To unlock either manual to the door handle.
locking front door from
the inside, pull back
on the manual lever.
To lock either front door
from the inside, push
the manual lever
forward.
Press the front of the switch to lock all doors, or
press the back of the switch to unlock all doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock
switches. Instead, each rear door has a manual
lever that works only that door’s lock.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, the power door lock switch may cause the
system to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 122 for more information.
115
Delayed Locking With the automatic door lock feature, you can still
lock or unlock the doors at any time, either
With the delayed locking feature, the doors will not manually, with the power door lock switches or by
lock immediately when locking the doors using pressing LOCK on the remote keyless entry
the power door lock switch or when LOCK on the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Operation on page 111 for more information.
while any door is open. Instead, three chimes will
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver
be heard to indicate that the delayed locking
Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle
feature is in operation. Five seconds after all doors
Personalization on page 240 to program the
are closed, the doors will lock automatically.
automatic door lock feature.
If the ignition is in ON or ACCESSORY, this
feature will not lock the doors. Rear Door Security Locks
Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security
Personalization on page 240 to program the locks that help prevent passengers from opening
delayed locking feature. the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside.
To use one of these locks do the following:
Programmable Automatic 1. Open one of the rear doors.
Door Locks
All of the doors will automatically lock when all
doors are closed, the engine is running and
the shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P). All of the
doors will automatically unlock when the shift
lever is shifted into PARK (P).
116
2. On the inside of the Canceling the Rear Door
rear door will be a Security Locks
lock. Push the
lever up to engage 1. Unlock and open the rear door from the
the safety lock. outside.
2. Push the lever down to disengage the
safety lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear
door lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other rear
door lock.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when this feature is in
use. If you want to open the rear door when the
security lock is on, unlock the door from the inside
and then open the door from the outside.
117
Lockout Protection Liftgate
The lockout protection feature may prevent you
from locking your key in your vehicle. Pressing the
power door lock switch will lock all doors, then {CAUTION:
unlock the driver’s door, if the key is in the ignition
when a door is opened. It can be dangerous to drive with the
If you leave the key in your vehicle but not in the liftgate open because carbon monoxide
ignition or if you use the manual door lock, (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
you could still lock the key in the vehicle. Always cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
remember to take the key with you. unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System on page 200.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 140.
118
Liftgate Release To open the liftgate using the touchpad, do the
following:
1. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
2. Unlock all of the doors.
3. Lift up on the liftgate handle.
If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry
transmitter, you may unlock the liftgate by pressing
the REAR button on the transmitter, then open
the liftgate manually by lifting up on the liftgate
handle. Pressing REAR while the Content
Theft-Deterrent is active allows you to open the
liftgate while all other doors remain locked.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 122.
Liftgate Handle Notice: If you open the liftgate without
checking for overhead obstructions such as a
Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate release garage door, you could break the liftgate
touchpad, located on the inner side of the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area
handle. above the liftgate is clear before opening it.
119
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
120
Power Windows The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. Push the rear of the switch to the
first position to lower the window normally.
Press the rear of any passenger window switch
and that window will open. Press the front of
any switch to close the window.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch also has an
express-down feature. This switch is labeled
AUTO. To activate the express-down feature, push
the rear of the driver’s window switch to the
second position, then release it. The window will
lower completely.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control front of the switch. To raise the window, press
each of the windows when the ignition is in ON, and hold the front of the switch.
ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Window Lockout
Power (RAP) on page 129 for more information. The driver’s window controls also include a
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window lockout switch. Press the right side of the WDO
switch. LOCK switch to stop rear passengers from
lowering their window. The driver can still control
all of the windows with the lockout on. Press
the other side of the WDO LOCK switch for normal
window operation.
121
Sun Visors Content Theft-Deterrent
To block out glare you can swing down the visors. Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm
You can also remove them from the center system.
mount and swing them to the side. There may be
an extension on the inboard side of the sun A security light, located
visors. Pull the extension out to block out glare. on top of the instrument
panel will flash slowly
Visor Vanity Mirror to let you know that the
Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to system has been
expose the vanity mirror. armed.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors

If your vehicle has this feature, pull down the sun
visor. Flip up the cover to expose the vanity
mirror. The lamps will come on when you open
the cover. While armed, the doors will not unlock with the
power door lock switch.
Theft-Deterrent Systems Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries
to enter the vehicle without using the optional
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some remote keyless entry transmitter or the key, or tries
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of to turn the ignition on without using the correct
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we key. The horn will sound and the headlamps and
put on it can make it impossible to steal. parking lamps will flash any time the alarm
sounds.
122
When the content theft-deterrent system is armed, Arming with the Remote Keyless
the liftgate may be opened by pressing the Entry Transmitter
REAR button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm will go into standby mode. Your alarm system will arm when you press LOCK
Once the liftgate is closed, the alarm will be once on your remote keyless entry transmitter
armed. See “Liftgate Release” under Liftgate on to lock the doors. The alarm system light will come
page 118 for more information on how to open the on for 30 seconds and then start flashing to let
liftgate. you know the system is armed.
Within the 30 second delay after the security light
Arming with the Power Lock Switch comes on, and an additional five seconds after
The content theft-deterrent alarm system will arm the light begins to flash, any door can be manually
when you use either power door lock switch to unlocked and opened, without sounding the
lock the doors while any door or the liftgate is open alarm.
and the key is removed from the ignition. The If LOCK is pressed on your remote keyless entry
security light, located on top of the instrument transmitter twice within five seconds, any door
panel, will start flashing when the system is armed. can be manually unlocked and opened within five
Within five seconds, after the security light seconds after the security light begins to flash,
begins to flash, any door can be manually without sounding the alarm. A door unlocked
unlocked and opened, without sounding the alarm. manually will remain unlocked until locked again.
A door unlocked manually will remain unlocked
until locked again. Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
key to unlock the driver’s door. The security
light will stop flashing to let you know the system
is no longer armed.
123
Disarming with the Remote Keyless This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Entry Transmitter Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your alarm system will disarm when you press 1. This device may not cause interference.
UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock the doors. The security light, on top of 2. This device must accept any interference
the instrument panel, will stop flashing to let received, including interference that may
you know the system is no longer armed. cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
PASS-Key® III than an authorized service facility could void
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry in the key that matches a decoder in your
Canada. vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
cause undesired operation.
124
PASS-Key® III Operation When the PASS-Key® III system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the
Your vehicle is equipped vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will
with the PASS-Key® III not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the
(Personalized engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to
Automotive Security start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the
System) theft-deterrent high number of electrical key codes.
system. If the SECURITY message is shown on the
Message Center when trying to start the vehicle,
the key may have a damaged transponder.
See “PASS-Key® III Security Message” under
Message Center on page 225. Turn the ignition off
and try to start the vehicle again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
®
PASS-Key III is a passive theft deterrent system. appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
This means you do not have to do anything different key. At this time, you may also want to check the
to arm or disarm the system. It works when you fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
insert or remove the key from the ignition. page 463. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III
to have a new key made.
125
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to To program the new PK3® key do the following:
program the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be 1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is 2. Insert the original key in the ignition and start
for programming additional keys only. If all the engine. If the engine will not start, see
the currently programmed keys are lost or do not your GM dealer for service.
operate, you must see your GM dealer or a 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to have OFF, and remove the key.
keys made and programmed to the system.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
See your GM dealer who can service ON within 10 seconds of removing the
PASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that is a cut previous key.
exactly as the ignition key that operates the
system. 5. The SECURITY message will turn off once
the key has been programmed. It may not
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your be apparent that the SECURITY message
keys, only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III went on due to how quickly the key is
to have new keys made. To program additional programmed.
keys you will need two current driver’s keys, black
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
in color. You must add a step to the following
are to be programmed.
procedure. After Step 3 repeat Steps 1 through 3
with the second current driver’s key. Then If you are ever driving and the SECURITY
continue with Step 4. message comes on and stays on, you will be able
to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your
PASS-Key® III system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your GM dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III
system at this time.
126
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see • Avoid making hard stops for the first
your GM dealer who can service PASS-Key® III to 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
have a new key made. your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
Starting and Operating Your premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
Vehicle you get new brake linings.
New Vehicle Break-In • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an Towing a Trailer on page 340 for the trailer
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
the long run if you follow these guidelines: information.
• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your Following break-in, engine speed and load can
speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for be gradually increased.
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
127
Ignition Positions B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to four while the engine is off. This position will also allow
different positions. you to turn off the engine. Use ACCESSORY if
you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is
being pushed or towed.
C (ON): This is the position that the switch
returns to after you start your engine and release
the key. The switch stays in ON when the
engine is running. But even when the engine is
not running, you can use ON to operate your
electrical power accessories, and to display some
instrument panel warning lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or On position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
can remove the key. This position locks the ignition an extended period of time.
and transaxle.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
ignition switch could cause damage or break switch will return to ON for normal driving.
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
128
Key In the Ignition Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, any other position — that is a safety feature.
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s To restart when you are already moving,
door. Always remember to remove your key from use NEUTRAL (N) only.
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
to lock the doors. moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it your ignition key to START. When the engine
has been parked for an extended period of time. starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine warms up. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) it. Operate the engine and transaxle gently
With RAP, the power windows, the audio system, until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving
the sunroof and the automatic level control will parts.
continue to work for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition key is turned to OFF or until one of the
doors is opened.
129
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled 2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,
Cranking System. This feature assists in push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter
starting the engine and protects the electrical of the way down while you turn the key to
system. If the ignition key is turned to the START. Do this until the engine starts.
START position, and then released when the As soon as it does, let go of the key.
engine begins cranking, the engine will 3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but
continue cranking until the vehicle starts or then stops, it could be flooded with too much
until it exceeds the maximum cranking gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator
time allowed, approximately 15 seconds to pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent there as you hold the key in START for
starter-motor gear damage, this system a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the
also prevents cranking if the engine is already extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
running. The engine cranking can be still will not start, or starts briefly but then
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the stops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on
ACCESSORY or LOCK position. the temperature. When the engine starts,
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer release the key and the accelerator pedal.
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
battery to be drained much sooner. And the the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
excessive heat can damage your starter motor. electrical parts or accessories, you could
Wait about 15 seconds between each try to change the way the engine operates. Before
help avoid draining your battery or damaging adding electrical equipment, check with
your starter. your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
130
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. {CAUTION:
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
easier starting and better fuel economy during outlet could cause an electrical shock.
engine warm-up. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of into a properly grounded three-prong
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
may also have an internal thermostat in the reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
1. Turn off the engine. not, it could be damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical How long should you keep the coolant heater
cord. The electrical cord is located on the plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
driver’s side of the engine compartment. temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,
outlet. we ask that you contact your dealer in the area
where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer
can give you the best advice for that particular area.
131
Automatic Transaxle Operation Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You
must fully apply your regular brakes first before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key
is in ON. As you step on the brake pedal, while
in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the
solenoid of the system. This ensures that the
system is operating properly. If you cannot shift out
Maximum engine speed is limited when you are in of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline and push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
components from improper operation. as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out
There are several different positions for your shift of Park (P) on page 138 for more information.
lever.
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front
wheels. It is the best position to use when you start {CAUTION:
your engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily. It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
132
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
CAUTION: (Continued) not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine being towed.
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be {CAUTION:
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level Shifting into a drive gear while your
ground, always set your parking brake engine is running at high speed is
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 136. If you the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer very rapidly. You could lose control and
on page 340. hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after high speed may damage the transaxle.
your vehicle is stopped. The repairs would not be covered by your
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
snow, ice or sand without damaging your high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 331.
133
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Warm-Up Shift
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are: Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your the outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder.
accelerator pedal about halfway down. You may notice that the transaxle will shift at
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push a higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmed
the accelerator all the way down. up. This is a normal condition designed to
You will shift down to the next gear and have provide heat to the passenger compartment and
more power. defrost the windows more quickly.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than
under Loss of Control on page 315. DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing
rather slowly or not shift gears when you go a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle and when going down a steep hill.
that way, you could damage the transaxle.
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
higher speeds until then. control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
134
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than Parking Brake
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also, The parking brake is
shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above located under the
65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive in instrument panel on the
THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2). driver’s side of the
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up vehicle.
rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears
as you go faster, something may be wrong with
a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very
far that way, your vehicle can be damaged.
So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced
right away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
(55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds. pedal down with your right foot and push down on
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1),
on page 219.
the transaxle will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If
you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
135
To release the parking brake, hold the regular Shifting Into Park (P)
brake pedal down with your right foot while
you push down on the parking brake pedal with
your left foot. When you lift your left foot from the
parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the
{CAUTION:
released position.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
overheat the brake system and cause PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
premature wear or damage to brake system
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is engine running, the vehicle can move
off before driving. suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
when you are on fairly level ground, use
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 340.
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 340.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling
the shift lever toward you and moving it up as
far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
136
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock
Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the
{CAUTION: parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it
difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock,
with the engine running. Your vehicle set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
could move suddenly if the shift lever is properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
page 136.
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
overheat and even catch fire. You or out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
others could be injured. Do not leave your brake.
vehicle with the engine running. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) out of PARK (P).
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
137
Shifting Out of Park (P) If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
control system which locks the shift lever in
PARK (P) when the ignition is in the OFF position. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of
In addition, you must fully apply your regular Step 4.
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when 3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
the ignition is in the ON position. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 132. 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear
you want.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the 5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear
you want.
138
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
139
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION: • Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
• Repairs were not done correctly.
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
cannot see or smell. It can cause
been modified improperly.
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
You might have exhaust coming in if: your vehicle:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange • Drive it only with all the windows
or different. down to blow out any CO; and
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
140
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if {CAUTION:
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
{CAUTION: PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
Idling the engine with the climate control your vehicle when the engine is running
system off could allow dangerous exhaust unless you have to. If you have left the
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution engine running, the vehicle can move
under Engine Exhaust on page 140. suddenly. You or others could be injured.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let To be sure your vehicle will not move,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your even when you are on fairly level ground,
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at always set your parking brake and move
the highest setting. One place this can the shift lever to PARK (P).
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
a garage with the engine running. will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. page 136.
See Winter Driving on page 327. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 340.
141
Mirrors Outside Power Mirror
The power mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror controls are located on
The vehicle may have a rearview mirror that can the driver’s door
be adjusted for day or night driving. Push or armrest.
pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror to adjust it
for day or night conditions.
The mirror’s two outer buttons operate the lamps
on the bottom of the mirror.
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 98 for
more information. To choose either the left or right outside mirror,
press the selector switch. Press any of the
four arrows located on the control pad to move the
mirrors in the desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
142
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
If the vehicle has this feature, it can be helpful seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things
when parallel parking. The passenger’s outside appear farther away than they really are.
rearview mirror will tilt towards the curb when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R) and return Outside Heated Mirrors
to its previous position when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (R). If further adjustment is If the vehicle has this feature, the outside rearview
needed, the power mirror controls can be used. mirrors are heated when the rear window
See Outside Power Mirror on page 142. Also see defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 240 for Defogger” under Climate Control System on
information on how to turn this feature on and off. page 200, Dual Climate Control System on
page 203, or Dual Automatic Climate Control
Outside Convex Mirror System on page 206.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
143
OnStar® System and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR
(1–888–466–7827) or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and provide the services described below, or for a
live advisors to provide you with a wide range full description of OnStar® services and system
of safety, security, information, and convenience limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is glove box or visit onstar.com.
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency OnStar® Services
services be sent to your location. If you lock For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at & Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to Plan is included for one year from the date of
unlock your doors. If you need roadside purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
can contact Roadside Service for you. Connections® Plan. For more information, press
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may OnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlock
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be
contacting OnStar® as provided below. A complete available until you register with OnStar®.
OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms
144
Available Services with Safe & Available Services included with
Sound® Plan Directions & Connections® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification • Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
(AACN) (If equipped) OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services • RideAssist
• Roadside Assistance • Information and Convenience Services
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
• AccidentAssist
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with
• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with 30 Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
complimentary minutes service plan, depending on eligibility. To find out
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor more, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the
vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisor
by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
145
OnStar® Virtual Advisor How OnStar® Service Works
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® In order to provide you with OnStar® services, your
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability of
to access location-based weather, local traffic recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone information is automatically sent to an OnStar® Call
button and giving a few simple voice commands, Center at the time of an OnStar® button press,
you can browse through the various topics. Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more system deploys. The vehicle information usually
information. includes your GPS location and, in the event of a
crash, additional information regarding the accident
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mute direction from which your vehicle was hit). When
button that can be used to interact with OnStar® you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends
Controls on page 296 for more information. OnStar® your GPS location so that we can provide
you with location-based services.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle is
button for a few seconds and give the command in a place where OnStar® has an agreement with a
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar® wireless service provider for service in that area.
Hands-Free Calling feature. OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are in
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to a place where the wireless service provider
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial OnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s network capacity and reception when the service is
Guide for more information. needed, and technology that is compatible with the
OnStar® service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
146
OnStar® service that involves location information Universal Home Remote
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in System
that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical Universal Home Remote System
system (including adequate battery power) for the (With Three Round LED)
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent The Universal Home Remote System provides a
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you way to replace up to three hand-held
at any particular time or place. Some examples are Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an activate devices such as garage door openers,
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather security systems, and home lighting.
or wireless phone network congestion.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Your Responsibility Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next 1. This device may not cause harmful
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that interference.
your system is not functioning properly and should 2. This device must accept any interference
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears received, including interference that may
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar® cause undesired operation.
subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar® button to confirm that your The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
OnStar® equipment is active. Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
147
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Canada. Operation is subject to the following Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference. 1. This device may not cause harmful
2. This device must accept any interference interference.
received, including interference that may 2. This device must accept any interference
cause undesired operation of the device. received, including interference that may
The Canadian Registration ID number is cause undesired operation.
3521A-GTE05A. The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Changes or modifications to this system by other Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
than an authorized service facility could void This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
authorization to use this equipment. Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote System 1. This device may not cause interference.
(With One Triangular LED) 2. This device must accept any interference
The Universal Home Remote System provides a cause undesired operation of the device.
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate The Canadian Registration ID number is
devices such as garage door openers, security 2791021849A.
systems, and home lighting. Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
148
Universal Home Remote System Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
Operation (With Three Round LED) feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
System. If there are three round Light Emitting future programming. You only need the original
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote remote control transmitter for fixed code
System buttons, follow the instructions below. If programming. It is also recommended that upon
there is one triangular LED above the Universal the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
Home Remote System buttons, follow the the programmed buttons should be erased for
instructions under Universal Home Remote System security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Operation (with one triangular LED). Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This system provides a way to replace up to Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
three remote control transmitters used to activate garage door or security device you are
devices such as garage door openers, security programming. When programming a garage door,
systems, and home lighting. it is advised to park outside of the garage.
149
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a

fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
150
Follow these steps to program up to three channels: Press and release all three buttons at the same
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held time to put the device into programming mode.
transmitter.
Example
Example of Switch Settings 4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch from left to right, and within two and one-half
settings from left to right. When the switch minutes, enter each switch setting into the
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a Universal Home Remote System. Push
switch is in the down position, write “off”. one button for each switch as follows:
If a switch is set between the up and down • Left button = “on” switch position.
position, write “middle”. • Right button = “off” switch position.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home • Middle button = “middle” switch position.
Remote System as follows.
151
5. After entering the switch settings, press and Programming Universal Home
release all three buttons at the same time. Remote — Rolling Code
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to Rolling code garage door openers are used for
use to control the garage door until the garage doors produced after 1996 and are
garage door moves. The indicator light above code protected. Rolling code means the coded
the selected button should slowly blink. signal is changed every time your remote control
You may need to hold the button from five to garage door opener is used.
55 seconds. Programming a rolling code garage door opener
7. Immediately release the button when the involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
garage door moves. The indicator light will entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
blink rapidly until programming is complete. follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
programming is successful and complete. 1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
To program another device such as an additional time for one to two seconds, and immediately
garage door opener, a security device, or release them.
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing
a different function button in Step 7 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
152
3. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door garage door opener, a security device, or
motor head and press and release the home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing
“learn” button. a different function button in Step 4 than what
After pressing the “learn” button, you have you used for the garage door opener.
10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
Using Universal Home Remote
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
the owners guide for your garage door opener. half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
153
Reprogramming Universal Home Universal Home Remote System
Remote Buttons Operation (With One Triangular LED)
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Universal Home Remote device, do the following: Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
the same time for approximately 20 seconds, Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
until the indicator lights, located directly below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly. the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, Operation (with three round LED).
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased. Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the
For additional information on Universal Home stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices door opener model manufactured before April 1,
on page 496. 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow
Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
154
Read the instructions completely before attempting Programming Universal Home Remote
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
have another person available to assist you in 1. Press and hold down the two outside
the programming steps. Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in only when the Universal Home Remote
other vehicles as well as for future Universal indicator light begins to flash, after
Home Remote programming. It is also 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons this step to program a second and/or
should be erased for security purposes. See third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in two Universal Home Remote buttons.
this section or, for assistance, see Customer 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
Assistance Offices on page 496. about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the Universal Home Remote buttons while
garage door or gate operator you are keeping the indicator light in view.
programming. When programming a garage door, 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
it is advised to park outside of the garage. desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
completed.
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal. Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
155
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
successfully receives the frequency signal or “Smart” button. This can usually be
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both found where the hanging antenna wire is
buttons. attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
Home Remote button and observe the “Smart” button. The name and color of
indicator light. the button may vary by manufacturer.
If the indicator light stays on continuously, You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
programming is complete and your device 8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
should activate when the Universal Home the programmed Universal Home Remote
Remote button is pressed and released. button for two seconds, then release. Repeat
To program the remaining two Universal Home the press/hold/release sequence a second
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under time, and depending on the brand of the
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do garage door opener or other rolling code
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of device, repeat this sequence a third time to
the programmed channels. complete the programming.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two The Universal Home Remote should now
seconds and then turns to a constant light, activate the rolling-code device.
continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
To program the remaining two Universal Home
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
device, most commonly, a garage door
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
opener.
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
156
Gate Operator and Canadian Using Universal Home Remote
Programming Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter Remote button for at least half of a second.
signals to time out or quit after several seconds The indicator light will come on while the signal is
of transmission. This may not be long enough being transmitted.
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal Erasing Universal Home Remote
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in Buttons
the same manner. To erase programming from the three Universal
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty Home Remote buttons do the following:
programming a gate operator or garage door 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
opener by using the “Programming Universal until the indicator light begins to flash, after
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where 20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
Remote button while you press and release every
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
button until the frequency signal has been
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
this section.
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Universal Home Remote” to complete. Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
157
Reprogramming a Single Universal Storage Areas
Home Remote Button
Glove Box
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the
previously trained, follow these steps: lock and turn the key counterclockwise. To
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home open the glove box, pull the latch release.
Remote button. Do not release the button. The glove box door has a set position that
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after prevents the door from lowering too far. Open the
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal glove box until the door is partway open, then
Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 pull the door down if you need it fully opened.
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up
shown earlier in this section. past the set position. To lock the glove box, put your
For additional information on Universal Home key into the lock and turn the key clockwise.
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 496. Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located in the floor
console.
The cupholders have liners that remove for larger
beverage items. Remove the liners by lifting
them out.
158
Your vehicle has cupholders located in the rear If your vehicle has the OnStar® System, the
seat armrests if it has a split folding rear seat. OnStar® buttons will replace the storage
If your vehicle has captain’s chairs, there compartment. See OnStar® System on page 144
are cupholders on the sides of the seats. If your for more information.
vehicle has a stowable seat, there are cupholders If your vehicle has a sunroof, the mini console
in the center of the seat. contains the Universal Home Remote buttons and
the OnStar® buttons.
Cell Phone Storage Area
Storage Compartment
Your vehicle has a cell phone storage
compartment located on the floor console storage To open the storage compartment located at the
closest to the driver’s seat. Lift the lid to use front of the overhead console, press the release
the storage compartment. The compartment has latch forward. Then pull the compartment down to
an accessory power outlet for charging the the full open position.
cell phone. Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Overhead Console To open the sunglasses storage compartment in
the overhead console, press the release button.
If your vehicle has an overhead console, it may Then pull the compartment down to the full
contain a storage compartment, a sunglasses open position.
storage compartment, and Universal Home
Remote buttons. See Universal Home Remote
System (With Three Round LED) on page 147 or
Universal Home Remote System (With One
Triangular LED) on page 148 for more information.
159
Floor Console Storage Area Rear Storage Area
The floor console storage area contains two There are four small storage compartments in the
cupholders, an ashtray, and a cellular phone rear of your vehicle. One is on the passenger’s
storage compartment with a cigarette side, two are on the driver’s side and one is on the
lighter/accessory power outlet. floor by the tailgate. To remove the covers, lift
Below the floor console storage, there is another up on the tabs. If your vehicle has the 10-speaker
storage area with two integrated convenience nets. system, the compartment on the passenger’s
side and the long compartment on the driver’s side
will be equipped with speakers.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage
compartment which contains two storage
compartments.
To unlock the front armrest storage compartment,
put your key into the lock and turn the key
counterclockwise. To open the armrest, squeeze
the lever while lifting the top to open it.
To close the armrest, push the lid down until you
hear a click. To lock the armrest, put your key
into the lock and turn the key clockwise.
160
Roof Rack System
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
If you have the luggage carrier with crossrails you
to have a collision, and of course damage
can load things on top of your vehicle. If you
your vehicle. You may be able to carry do load things on the top of your vehicle, you must
something like this inside. But, never load them on the luggage carrier crossrails.
carry something longer or wider than the Some vehicles may not have the crossrails.
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Notice: Damage may be caused to the roof of
your vehicle if anything is placed directly
on the roof.
161
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
proper size and weight, put it on the slats and
distribute the weight evenly. Then slide the
crossrail, if the vehicle has one, up against the rear
of the load to keep it from moving. You can then tie
it down. Cargo containers must be loaded on the
crossrails only.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 332.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are
driving, check now and then to make sure
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely
that weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or fastened.
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may Loading things onto the luggage carrier can
damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it interfere with the performance of your XM™
rests on the slats as far forward as possible Satellite Radio System, if the vehicle has one.
and against the side rails, making sure to
fasten it securely.
162
Your luggage carrier has release levers within the To adjust the crossrail(s), the sunroof stop (A), if
end of each crossrail support. the vehicle has one, must be removed.
To remove the sunroof stop, do the following:
1. Find the tool (B) located in a bag in the glove
box labeled TOOL KIT-ACSRY.
2. Use the tool to remove the screw located in
the side rail assembly in front of the front
crossrail.
3. Repeat for the other side.
4. Put the tool and the screws back in the plastic
bag in the glove box.
163
To adjust the crossrails, lift the release levers on Convenience Net
each side to unlock them. Slide the crossrails
forward or backward, as needed, to accommodate Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
loads of various sizes. convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over.
After repositioning the crossrails, push the release Install the convenience net at the rear of your
lever down. This will lock the crossrails in place. vehicle, just inside the liftgate/tailgate opening.
Notice: Opening the sunroof when the Attach both the upper and lower hooks to the loops
luggage rack crossrails are not in the full-rear on either side of the liftgate opening. The label
position could cause damage to the sunroof on the net should be in the upper left corner.
or luggage rack. Verify the luggage rack
crossrails are in the full-rear position before The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
opening the sunroof. 100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold
larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor
When you are done using the crossrails you must of your vehicle, as far forward as you can.
replace the sunroof stop.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take
To replace the sunroof stop, do the following: down the rear convenience net to extend its life
1. Put the crossrails in the full rear position. and retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear
2. Using the tool, put the screws back into each exit clear. Store the net in one of the storage
side rail assembly. Make sure the screws are compartments.
in the first hole in front of the crossrail.
164
Cargo Cover Rear Convenience Center
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it
to cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Remove
the cover from its pouch and place the loops {CAUTION:
found on each corner of the cover, over the
four pegs in each corner of the rear if the vehicle. If any removable convenience item is not
When it is not in use, fold up the cover and secured properly, it can move around in a
return it to the pouch. collision or sudden stop. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
secure any such item properly.
Your vehicle may have a rear convenience center.

The rear convenience center can be used to
organize and store items in your vehicle.
165
The extended rear convenience center, without Removing the Extended Rear
the optional third row stowable seat, has a forward Convenience Center
bin and rear bin. The rear convenience center,
with the optional third row stowable seat, contains 1. Make sure that all items have been removed
one storage bin. from the top and the inside of the rear
convenience center.
To use the convenience center, remove the
carpeted mat and lift the handle(s) on the top of 2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.
the lid to open the storage bin. 3. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open
The extended rear convenience center has a the rear storage bin. The center lid will also
maximum weight capacity of 400 lbs (181.6 kg) need to be opened.
on top. 4. Remove the two nuts from inside the rear
The shorter rear convenience center that comes storage bin. The nuts are located in the
with the optional third row stowable seat has bottom of the bin.
a maximum weight capacity of 100 lbs (45.4 kg) 5. Lift the rear storage bin and remove it from
on top. the rear of the vehicle.
6. Remove the two nuts inside the forward
storage bin. These nuts are located along
the bottom of the center divider wall.
7. Lift the forward storage bin and remove it
from the rear of the vehicle.
166
Reinstalling the Extended Rear
Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items have been removed
from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the carpeted mat from the vehicle.
5. Lift the rear bin into the back of the vehicle.

Place the rear bin over the center T-shaped
wall on the forward bin. Push down to secure.
Align the rear bin over the rear mounting bolts.
6. Put the nuts back onto the mounting bolts and
tighten.
3. Lift the forward bin into the back of the 7. Push and pull on the rear storage system to
vehicle. Place the mounting brackets onto the make sure that it is locked into place properly.
forward mounting bolts on the floor of the
vehicle.
tighten.
167
Removing the Rear Convenience Reinstalling the Rear Convenience
Center on Vehicles with the Third Row Center on Vehicles with the Third Row
Stowable Seat Stowable Seat
1. Make sure that all items have been removed 1. Make sure that all items have been removed
from the top and the inside of the rear from the rear of the vehicle.
convenience center.
2. Lift the handle(s) on the top of the lid to open
the storage bin.
3. Remove the two nuts from inside the storage
bin. The nuts are located in the bottom of
the bin.
If you are only removing the convenience
center and not the stowable seat, you must
replace these nuts once the bin is removed to
secure the seat.
4. Lift the storage bin and remove it from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Lift the bin into the back of the vehicle. Align

the bin over the rear mounting bolts.
tighten.
4. Push and pull on the rear storage system to
make sure that it is locked into place properly.
168
Sunroof Notice: Opening the sunroof when the
luggage rack crossrails are not in the full-rear
If the vehicle has a position could cause damage to the sunroof
sunroof, the switch to or luggage rack. Verify the luggage rack
operate it is located crossrails are in the full-rear position before
on the headliner, opening the sunroof.
between the sun visors. Press the rear of the switch to open the sunroof to
the vent position. The sunshade must be opened
by hand.
Press and release the rear of the switch a second
time to express-open the sunroof. The sunshade
will open with the sunroof. Press the switch in
either direction to stop it from moving. If the rear
The sunroof switch will only work when the ignition of the switch is pressed and held, the
is ON or when the ignition is OFF and Retained express-open operation will be overridden.
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 129.
the switch.
169
✍ NOTES
170
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 174 Front Reading Lamps ................................ 191
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 176 Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 191
Other Warning Devices ............................. 176 Cargo Lamp .............................................. 192
Horn .......................................................... 176 Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 192
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 177 Instrument Panel Switchbank ..................... 192
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 177 Head-Up Display (HUD) ............................ 193
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 178 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 196
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 179 Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 199
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 179 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 200
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 179 Climate Controls ......................................... 200
Windshield Washer .................................... 180 Climate Control System ............................. 200
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 180 Dual Climate Control System ..................... 203
Cruise Control ........................................... 181 Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 206
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 185 Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 210
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 186
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 187 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 211
Fog Lamps ................................................ 187 Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 212
Interior Lamps ........................................... 188 Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 213
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 188 Trip Odometer ........................................... 213
Interior Lamps Control ............................... 188 Tachometer ............................................... 214
Headlamp Exit Delay ................................. 189 Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 215
Entry Lighting ............................................ 189 Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 215
Delayed Lighting ........................................ 190 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 217
Exit Lighting .............................................. 190 Brake System Warning Light ..................... 219
Perimeter Lighting ..................................... 191 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 220
171
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Program Mode Message ........................... 233
Light ...................................................... 220 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 221 Low Warning Message ........................... 234
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 222 Parking Lamp Warning Message ............... 234
Fuel Gage ................................................. 225 Highbeam Out Warning Message .............. 235
Message Center .......................................... 225 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 235
Passenger Seatbelt Reminder Message ..... 226 DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 236
Service Traction System Warning DIC Compass ............................................ 238
Message ................................................ 226 DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 240
Traction Active Message ........................... 227 Audio System(s) ......................................... 250
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Setting the Time ........................................ 252
Message ................................................ 227 Radio with CD ........................................... 252
Charging System Indicator Message .......... 228 Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 262
Reduced Engine Power Message .............. 228 XM Radio Messages ................................. 276
Low Oil Pressure Message ........................ 229 Navigation/Radio System ........................... 277
Change Engine Oil Message ..................... 230 Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 277
Door Ajar Warning Message ...................... 230 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 293
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ............ 230 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 296
Check Gas Cap Message ......................... 231 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 296
PASS-Key® III Security Message ............... 231 Radio Reception ........................................ 297
Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ......... 231 Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 298
Low Fuel Warning Message ...................... 232 Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 298
Low Brake Fluid Warning Message ........... 232 Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 299
Service Vehicle Soon Message ................. 233 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 299
172
✍ NOTES
173
Instrument Panel Overview
174
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior/Interior Lamps Control. See Exterior J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
Lamps on page 185 and Interior Lamps page 363.
on page 188. K. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn page 128.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 177. L. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
C. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard on page 200, Dual Climate Control System
Warning Flashers on page 176. on page 203 or Dual Automatic Climate Control
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument System on page 206.
Panel Cluster on page 212. M. Instrument Panel Switchbank. See Instrument
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation Panel Switchbank on page 192.
on page 132. N. Front Armrest Storage. See Front Armrest
F. Instrument Panel Outlets. See Outlet Storage Area on page 160.
Adjustment on page 210. O. Ashtray/Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on Outlet/Cell Phone Storage/Cupholders.
page 250. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 200, Accessory Power Outlet(s) on
H. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
page 199, Cell Phone Storage Area on
Steering Wheel Controls on page 296.
page 159, Floor Console Storage Area on
I. Head-Up Display Switch and Driver Information page 160 and Cupholder(s) on page 158.
Center (DIC) Controls (If Equipped). See
P. Floor Console Fuse Block. See Floor Console
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 193 and DIC
Fuse Block on page 463.
Controls and Displays on page 236.
Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 158.
175
Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They again to turn the flashers off.
also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
and off. turn signals will not work.
The hazard warning Other Warning Devices

flasher button is located If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
on top of the steering at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
column. behind your vehicle.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
ignition position the key is in, and even if the
key is not in the ignition.
176
Tilt Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel
to the highest level to give your legs more room
when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that lets you tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold

the wheel and pull the
lever. Then move
the wheel to a
comfortable position and The lever on the left side of the steering column
release the lever to includes the following:
lock the wheel in place. • G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 178.
• 5 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 179.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 179.
• WIPER N Windshield Wipers. See
Windshield Wipers on page 179.
177
• L PUSH Windshield Washer. See As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
Windshield Washer on page 180. flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
• CRUISE I Cruise Control. See Cruise turn signal.
Control on page 181.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
Turn and Lane-Change Signals you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
downward (for left) positions. These positions on page 463.
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. If you have a trailer towing option with added
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb
return automatically. is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal
lamps regularly to make sure they are working.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster Turn Signal On Chime
and the HUD display If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
will flash in the direction (1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver
of the turn or lane know to turn it off.
change. If you need to leave the signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the back on.
lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it
there until you complete your lane change. The
lever will return by itself when you release it.
178
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer MIST: For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.
To change the headlamps from low to high, The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want
push the turn signal lever away from you, then more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.
release it. To change the headlamps from high to
low, pull the lever toward you. Delay: For delayed wiping cycles, you can set the
wiper speed for a long or short delay between
When the high beams wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.
are on, this light on the Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
instrument panel closer to LO, the shorter the delay time.
cluster and the HUD
display, if the vehicle LO: For steady wiping cycles at low speed, turn
has this, will also be on. the band away from you to the LO position.
HI: For high-speed wiping, turn the band away
Flash-to-Pass from you to the HI position.
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward OFF: To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
you to momentarily turn on the high beams. Remember that damaged wiper blades may
This will signal that you are going to pass. When prevent you from seeing well enough to drive
you release the lever, they will turn off. safely. To avoid damage, carefully clear ice and
snow from the wiper blades before using them. If
Windshield Wipers they are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
WIPER N: Turn the band marked WIPER to damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
control the windshield wipers. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A
circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
179
Windshield Washer Rear Window Wiper/Washer
L PUSH: To wash your windshield, press and The rear window
hold the paddle with the windshield washer washer/wiper switch is
symbol. The washers and wipers will operate. located in the
When you release the paddle, the washers instrument panel
will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate switchbank. See
for two cycles, unless your wipers were already on. Instrument Panel
In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper Switchbank on
speed you selected earlier. page 192.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed. Z (Rear Intermittent Wiper): Press the wiper
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice symbol on the top of the switch to turn on
the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper, gently
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
press the bottom of the switch.
180
= (Rear Wiper/Washer): To wash and wipe the
rear window, press the washer symbol on the {CAUTION:
bottom of the switch. Washer fluid will spray as
long as the switch is held in. When the switch
is released, the wiper will continue to cycle In freezing weather, do not use your
three more times. There is only one washer fluid washer until the windshield is warmed.
reservoir for the front and rear windshield Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
wipers. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 388. on the windshield, blocking your vision.
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is
already on, press the bottom of the switch.
Press the top of the switch to continue the Cruise Control
intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
completed. about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
The rear window washer uses the same fluid keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
bottle as the windshield washer. However, the rear really help on long trips.
window washer will run out of fluid before the Cruise control does not work at speeds below
windshield washer. If you can wash your about 25 mph (40 km/h).
windshield but not your rear window, check the
fluid level. When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
disengages.
Remember that a damaged wiper blade may
prevent you from seeing well enough to drive
safely. To avoid damage, carefully clear ice and
snow from the wiper blade before using it. If
it is frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw the wiper blade. If your blade becomes
damaged, get a new blade or blade insert.
181
The cruise controls are
located on the end of
the turn signal/ {CAUTION:
multifunction lever.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
ON: Move the switch to this position to turn the excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
cruise control system on. control. Do not use cruise control on
R/A: Move the switch to this position to resume a slippery roads.
set speed or to accelerate.
SET: Press this button, located at the end of the If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
lever, to set a speed. traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
OFF: This position turns the cruise control system See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 310.
off and cancels memory of a set speed. When road conditions allow you to safely use
it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
182
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of
{CAUTION: course, shuts off the cruise control. But you do not
need to reset it. Once you are going about 25 mph
If you leave your cruise control on when (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control
you are not using cruise, you might hit a switch from ON to Resume/Accelerate (R/A) briefly.
button and go into cruise when you do not You will go right back up to your chosen speed
want to. You could be startled and even and stay there.
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep
off until you want to use cruise control. going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
do not hold the switch at R/A.
1. Move the cruise control switch located on the
turn signal/multifunction lever, to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
183
Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase speed while using There are two ways to reduce speed while using
cruise control: cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher • Press the SET button at the end of the lever
speed. Press the SET button at the end of until you reach the lower speed you want,
the lever, then release the button and then release it.
the accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at • To slow down in very small amounts, press
the higher speed. the SET button briefly. Each time you do
• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
it there until you get up to the speed you slower.
want, and then release the switch. To increase
your speed in very small amounts, move the Passing Another Vehicle While Using
switch to R/A briefly and then release it. Cruise Control
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. When you take your foot off the pedal, your
The accelerate feature will work whether or not vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you have set an initial cruise control speed. you set earlier.
184
Using Cruise Control on Hills Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon your speed, load and the steepness The control on the left
of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may side of the steering
have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain column operates
your speed. When going downhill, you may the exterior lamps.
have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find
this to be too much trouble and do not use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: The exterior lamp control has three positions:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal. AUTO (Automatic Headlamp Control/Off):
• Move the cruise control switch to OFF. Turning the control to this position will activate the
automatic headlamps when it is dark enough
Erasing Speed Memory outside and turn off all lamps and lights during the
When you turn off the cruise control or the day except for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is
erased.
185
< (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
position turns on the parking lamps together makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
with the following: The DRL system will make your reduced
intensity low-beam headlamps come on in daylight
• Taillamps when the following conditions are met:
• Instrument Panel Lights • The ignition is on.
5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
position turns on the headlamps together with the • The shift lever is not in PARK (P).
previously listed lamps and lights.
When the DRL are on, only your reduced intensity
Lamps on Reminder high-beam headlamps will be on. Your instrument
panel will not be lit up.
If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the
ignition to OFF while leaving the lamps on, you will When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps
hear a warning chime. will come on automatically. When it is bright
enough outside, the exterior lamps will go out and
the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) turn on the headlamps any time you need to.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
for others to see the front of your vehicle during headlamp system when you need it.
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
186
Automatic Headlamp System Press the FOG PUSH button to turn the fog lamps
on. The FOG light, located next to the fog lamp
When the exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO, button, will come on to indicate when the fog
and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps lamps are on. To turn off the fog lamps, press the
and parking lamps will, automatically, come on. fog lamp button or turn the ignition off.
The lamps will also come on automatically if If you turn on the fog lamps while the DRL are on,
the following conditions are met: the parking lamps will turn on automatically.
• The ignition is in ON. Your fog lamps will go off when you switch to high
• The parking brake is released. beams. When you return to low beam, the fog
lamps will come back on. Using your high beams
in fog is not recommended.
Fog Lamps
Some localities have laws that require the
The fog lamp button is headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
located on the exterior
lamp control.
187
Interior Lamps Interior Lamps Control
The interior lamps can be controlled, or The interior lamp control
automatically turn on or off under certain conditions. is located to the left of
They are explained in the following text. the steering column,
below the exterior lamp
Instrument Panel Brightness control.
This feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. The knob for this feature
is located on the interior lamps control. Press
the knob to extend it. Turn the knob to adjust the
instrument panel brightness. Press the knob in
when not in use.
Turn the interior lamp control to one of the
following positions:
OFF: This position turns the interior lamps off.
DOOR: This position turns on the interior
lamps when any door is opened and when the
ignition key is removed from the ignition.
ON: This position turns the interior lamps on.
188
Headlamp Exit Delay Entry Lighting
If your vehicle has headlamp exit delay, it will keep If your vehicle has entry lighting, the interior of
the headlamps and parking lamps on at night for your vehicle will illuminate for 25 seconds so you
30 seconds if the following conditions are met: can see inside your vehicle before you enter.
• The ignition is turned to OFF. To activate entry lighting, do one of the following:
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO • Unlock a door using the key when the
position. interior lamp control is in the DOOR position,
and when the ignition is in OFF.
• LOCK is pressed on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. • Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter when the interior lamp control is
• It is dark enough outside. in the DOOR position, and when the ignition is
After 30 seconds, the headlamps and parking in OFF.
lamps will turn off. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.
The lamps will turn off before the 30 seconds if The lamps will turn off before 25 seconds if
the following conditions are met: you do one of the following:
• The ignition is turned to ON. • Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
• The exterior lamp control is turned out of the transmitter.
AUTO position. • Press the front of the power door lock switch.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver • Turn the ignition to ON.
Information Center (DIC), see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 240 to program the When any door is opened, entry lighting is
headlamp exit delay feature. cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while
any door or the liftgate is open, and fade out when
all the doors are closed.
189
Delayed Lighting Exit Lighting
If your vehicle has delayed lighting, it will continue If your vehicle has exit lighting, the interior lamps
to illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all will come on for about 30 seconds whenever
doors have been closed. The lamps will continue to you remove the key from the ignition if the
illuminate when the following conditions are met: following conditions are met:
• A door is opened then closed. • The vehicle is in PARK (P).
• The interior lamp control is in the DOOR • The key is out of the ignition.
position. • The interior lamp control is in the DOOR
• The ignition is in OFF. position.
After 25 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out. • All of the doors are closed.
The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds After 30 seconds, the interior lamps will fade out.
if you do one of the following: The interior lamps will fade out before 30 seconds
• Turn the ignition to ON. if you do one of the following:
• Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry • Turn the ignition to ON.
transmitter. • Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
• Press the front of the power door lock switch. transmitter.
If your vehicle has with the Driver Information • Press the front of the power door lock switch.
Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or If your vehicle has the Driver Information
off. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on Center (DIC), you can program this feature on or
page 240. off. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 240.
190
Perimeter Lighting Front Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has perimeter lighting, it will turn on There are two reading lamps located on the
the headlamps and parking lamps for 25 seconds rearview mirror.
when the following conditions are met: To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the
• The ignition is turned to OFF. button located next to each lamp. These lamps will
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO come on each time you open the doors, if the
position. interior lamp control is in the ON or DOOR
position.
• UNLOCK is pressed on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Rear Reading Lamps
• It is dark enough outside.
There are two reading lamps with coat hooks
After 25 seconds, the headlamps and parking
above the rear doors.
lamps will turn off.
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the
The lamps will turn off before the 25 seconds if
lens of the lamp.
you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to ON.
• Turn the exterior lamp control out of the
AUTO position.
If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center
(DIC), you can program this feature on or off. See
“Lock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 240.
191
Cargo Lamp If the interior lamps are turned off as a result of
the battery saver feature, they may be turned back
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of the on by turning the interior lamp control to OFF
vehicle, above the liftgate opening. It comes on and then back to ON. The battery saver will not
automatically each time you open the doors, if the turn the interior lamps off automatically after doing
interior lamp control is in the DOOR position. this. They will have to be turned off manually.
There are two reading lamps located on the cargo
lamp. To turn either reading lamp on or off, Instrument Panel Switchbank
press the button located next to the lamp.
There is an instrument panel switchbank located
below the climate controls. It contains switches
Battery Run-Down Protection or blanks that will vary with the options that are on
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you your vehicle.
from draining the battery, in case you accidentally The switches you may have are:
leave the interior or exterior lamps on. If the • Rear Window Wiper/Washer. See Windshield
interior lamps are left on while the ignition is in
Washer on page 180.
OFF, they will automatically turn off after
10 minutes. If the exterior lamps are left on while • Traction Disable. See Traction Control System
the ignition is in OFF with all doors and the (TCS) on page 310.
liftgate closed, they will automatically turn off after • Park Aid Disable. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
10 minutes. Assist (URPA) on page 196.
If your vehicle has less than 14 miles (24 km) on • Heated Seats. See Heated Seats on page 11.
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off
the lamps after only three minutes.
192
Head-Up Display (HUD) The HUD is capable of displaying English or
French. See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 236 to change the display from English to
metric.
{CAUTION:
The HUD will display the following lights and
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high messages when they appear on the instrument
panel cluster:
in your field of view, it may take you more
time to see things you need to see when it • Turn Signal Indicators. See Turn
is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 177.
image dim and placed low in your field • High-Beam Indicator. See Headlamp
of view. High/Low-Beam Changer on page 179.
• Low-Fuel Warning Message. See Low Fuel
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), it Warning Message on page 232.
can show the speedometer reading in English
or metric. The current audio system information,
as well as Rear Seat Entertainment system
information, may also be displayed and will appear
as an image focused out toward the front of
your vehicle.
193
The Head-Up Display also displays a CHECK Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a
GAGES message. The following messages could parking aid, you may misjudge the distance
appear on the instrument panel cluster when and damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD
CHECK GAGES appears: image as a parking aid.
• Engine Coolant Temperature Warning. See The HUD controls are
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning located to the left of the
Message on page 227. steering wheel on the
• Low Oil Pressure. See Low Oil Pressure instrument panel.
Message on page 229.
• Charging System Indicator. See Charging
System Indicator Message on page 228.
• Low Brake Fluid Warning. See Low Brake
Fluid Warning Message on page 232.
When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will

always be displayed. The current audio system
information will only be displayed for three seconds
after the radio, tape or CD track status changes.
This will happen whenever one of the radio controls
Under warning conditions, the CHECK GAGES is pressed, either on the radio or on the audio
message will illuminate in the HUD. Look at steering wheel controls, if equipped.
the instrument panel cluster for more information.
194
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do 3. Press the UP or DN buttons until the HUD
the following: image is easy to see and then press the DN
button until the HUD image is as low as
1. Start your engine and turn the dimmer knob to possible, but remains in full view straight
the desired HUD image brightness. ahead near the front bumper.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined The HUD image can only be adjusted up and
by the ambient light conditions in the direction down, not side-to-side.
your vehicle is facing and where you have the
HUD dimmer knob set. If you are facing a dark 4. To turn the image off, turn the dimmer knob
object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD may counterclockwise until it stops.
anticipate that you are entering a dark area and If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, you
may begin to dim. may need to adjust the HUD brightness again
2. Adjust the driver’s seat. If you change your using the dimmer knob. Polarized sunglasses
seat position, you may have to readjust could make the HUD image harder to see.
your HUD. When you first start the vehicle the display will
show BUICK and the Buick logo for a few seconds.
If it is cold outside, this display may stay on for
up to a minute.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to
remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness
or clarity of the HUD image.
195
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner Ultrasonic Rear Parking
on a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently,
then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens Assist (URPA)
because the cleaner could leak into the unit. The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD system is designed to help you park, while the
image, check to see if one of the following vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates only at very
conditions exist: low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA
• The HUD unit is covered can help make parking easier and to help
you avoid colliding with objects such as parked
• The HUD dimmer knob is adjusted incorrectly vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects up
• The HUD image is not adjusted to the to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell
proper height you how close these objects are from your rear
bumper.
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is
facing, is low Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic
Breakers on page 463.
sensors located at the rear bumper are used to
Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the detect the distance to the object. The URPA
HUD. See Windshield Replacement on page 404. display is located inside the vehicle, near the rear
window. It has three color-coded lights used to
provide distance and system information to
the driver.
196
URPA can be turned off
by pressing the rear
{CAUTION: park aid disable switch
located in the
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA) instrument panel
system does not replace driver vision. switchbank.
URPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the When the system is disabled, an indicator light will
glow on the switch. You will not see any lights on
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
the rear display if the switch is in the off position.
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians, How the System Works
bicyclists, or pets.
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on
So if you do not use proper care before
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
REVERSE (R). When the system turns on, the
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
three lights on the display will illuminate for one and
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
a half seconds to let you know that the system is
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R)
always check carefully before backing up
at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red
by checking behind your vehicle.
light will flash to remind you that the system does
not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
197
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed When the System Does Not Seem to
of less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following Work Properly
will occur:
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
Description English Metric REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are
amber light 5 ft 1.5 m not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear
amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.
amber/amber/red lights &
Other conditions that may affect system
continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m performance include things like the vibrations from
amber/amber/red lights a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes
flashing & continuous 1 ft 0.3 m on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
chime rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash
A chime will sound the first time an object is red, see your dealer.
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet
(1.5 m) away. If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,
level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize the light may also flash red. The light will continue
an object, it must be within detection range behind to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until your
the vehicle. vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)
without any obstructions behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
198
Accessory Power Outlet(s) If you experience a problem, see your dealer for
additional information on the accessory power
With accessory power outlets you can plug in outlets.
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone
or CB radio. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
There is one front power outlet/cigarette lighter components from working as they should.
located on the floor console in the cell phone The repairs would not be covered by your
storage compartment. warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
There are also two rear power outlets. One is maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
located in the rear of the floor console below the Check with your dealer before adding electrical
vents. The other is located in the rear of the vehicle equipment.
on the driver’s side behind the access door. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
Pull the cover down to use an accessory power follow the proper installation instructions included
outlet. When not in use, always cover the with the equipment.
accessory power outlets with the protective cap. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on cause damage not covered by your warranty.
for extended periods will drain the battery. Do not hang any type of accessory or
Always turn off electrical equipment when not accessory bracket from the plug because the
in use and do not plug in equipment that power outlets are designed for accessory
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of power plugs only.
20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
199
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
The ashtray is located on the floor console closest
to the instrument panel. Lift the lid to expose Climate Control System
the ashtray. To remove the ashtray, lift it up.
With this system you can control the heating,
The cigarette lighter is located on the floor console cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
in the cell phone storage compartment closest
to the driver’s seat. Lift the lid to expose the
cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating will not allow the lighter to
back away from the heating element when it is
hot. Damage from overheating may occur to
the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could
be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating. Operation
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes to direct the airflow inside your vehicle.
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
200
To change the current mode, select one of the @ (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
following: from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering your
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your
panel outlets. vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to recirculation mode on or off. When the button
the instrument panel outlets, then directs the is pressed, an indicator light will come on.
remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air The air-conditioning compressor also comes on.
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to The recirculation mode can be used with vent and
the floor outlets. bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the or decrease the air temperature inside your
front seats free of objects that could obstruct vehicle.
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or u A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
defrost mode. For more information, see turn the air-conditioning system on or off.
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that air
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or conditioning is activated.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan You may notice a slight change in engine
speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan. performance when the air-conditioning compressor
The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
compressor to operate.
201
The system is designed to make adjustments to Turn the right knob to select the defog or
help with fuel economy while still maintaining defrost mode.
the selected temperature.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce this mode, the system turns off recirculation
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small the defog mode.
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. 0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
This is normal. the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
Defogging and Defrosting the system will automatically turn off recirculation
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
controls system is used properly. There are two defrost mode.
modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or clear.
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
202
Rear Window Defogger Dual Climate Control System
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to Your vehicle may have a dual climate control
remove fog from the rear window. system. With this system you can control
the heating, cooling, and ventilation for your
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear vehicle.
window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only
run for approximately five minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning off the
engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could Operation
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
to direct the airflow inside your vehicle.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
203
To change the current mode, select one of the @ (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
following: from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from entering your
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your
panel outlets. vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to recirculation mode on or off. When the button
the instrument panel outlets, then directs the is pressed, an indicator light will come on.
remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air The air-conditioning compressor also comes on.
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to The recirculation mode can be used with vent and
the floor outlets. bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to passenger’s temperature levers to increase or
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the decrease the air temperature inside your vehicle.
front seats free of objects that could obstruct
airflow to the rear of the vehicle. u A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button
The right knob can also be used to select defog or to turn the air-conditioning system on or off. When
defrost mode. For more information, see A/C is pressed, an indicator light in the button
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section. will come on to let you know that air conditioning
is activated.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or You may notice a slight change in engine
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan performance when the air-conditioning compressor
speed. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
stops to turn off the fan. The fan must be turned The system is designed to make adjustments to
on for the air conditioning compressor to operate. help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
204
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside Turn the right knob to select the defog or
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce defrost mode.
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. - (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
The air-conditioning system removes moisture this mode, the system turns off recirculation
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
amount of water dripping underneath your the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
This is normal. the defog mode.
Defogging and Defrosting 0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high the windshield and the side window outlets, with
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate the system will automatically turn off recirculation
controls system is used properly. There are and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless
two modes to clear fog or frost from your the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the defrost mode.
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are
or frost from the windshield more quickly. clear.
205
Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to System
remove fog from the rear window.
Your vehicle may have the dual automatic climate
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear control system. With this system you can control
window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the the heating, cooling, and ventilation for your
button will come on to let you know that the vehicle.
rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off
approximately 10 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning off the
engine.
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the Automatic Operation
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, AUTO (Automatic): When the driver’s
tape, a decal or anything similar to the temperature knob is pressed to select AUTO and
defogger grid. the temperature is set, the system will
automatically control the inside temperature, the
air delivery and the fan speed. AUTO will also
appear on the display.
206
To place the entire system in automatic mode, do 3. Adjust the PASS TEMP indicator that is
the following: located below the temperature display. If
1. Press the driver’s temperature knob to turn only the larger center bar is lit, the passenger
the system on. side will be adjust to the same temperature
setting as the driver side. Each bar that is lit to
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable the + side of the center bar indicates that
setting. the passenger side will control to a warmer
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting than the driver side. Each bar lit to
will not cause the system to heat or cool the — side of the center bar indicates that the
any faster. passenger side will control to a cooler
In cold weather, the system will start at setting than the driver side.
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air 4. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
into your vehicle until warmer air is available. from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the
Then, as the air warms, it will be delivered temperature as necessary.
through the instrument panel outlets. The
5. To turn the system off, press the
length of time needed for warm up will depend
passenger’s knob.
on the outside temperature and the length
of time that has elapsed since your vehicle was Manual Operation
last driven.
MODE: Press this button to manually change the
direction of airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing
the button until the desired mode appears on
the display.
207
To change the current mode, select one of the VENT: Press this button to turn the outside air
following: mode on or off. When this mode is on, outside air
will be circulated throughout your vehicle. VENT
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used
panel outlets. with the recirculation mode.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately @ (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, then from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets and prevent outside air and odors from entering your
the defroster and side window outlets. Cooler air is vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the
the floor outlets. recirculation mode on or off. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to The air-conditioning compressor also comes on.
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to The recirculation mode can be used with vent and
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
front seats free of objects that could obstruct defog, defrost or outside air modes.
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The MODE button can also be used to select Temperature Control: Use the DRIVER knob to
defog. For more information, see “Defogging and increase or decrease the air temperature inside
Defrosting” later in this section. your vehicle. If the front passenger would like the
temperature to be warmer or cooler, use the
9 (Fan): Press this button to increase to PASS knob to adjust the passenger’s temperature.
decrease the fan speed; keep pressing the up or Air Conditioning: The air-conditioning
down arrow until the desired fan speed appears compressor will automatically come on when a
on the display. temperature cooler than the interior temperature is
chosen using the temperature knobs.
208
You may notice a slight change in engine Use the MODE button to select the defog mode.
performance when the air-conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal. - (Defog): This mode directs air to the
The system is designed to make adjustments to windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
help with fuel economy while still maintaining this mode, the system turns off recirculation
the selected temperature. and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. the defog mode.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. Press the defrost button to select defrost.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
amount of water dripping underneath your the windshield and the side window outlets, with
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
This is normal. the system will automatically turns off recirculation
and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless
Defogging and Defrosting the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool defrost mode.
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are
controls system is used properly. There are two clear.
modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
209
Rear Window Defogger Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to Use the louvers located on the air outlets to
remove fog from the rear window. change the direction of the airflow.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear Operation Tips
window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
button will come on to let you know that the air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may
rear window defogger is activated. block the flow of air into your vehicle.
The rear window defogger will turn off • Do not use any non-GM approved hood
approximately 10 minutes after the button is deflectors that could adversely affect the
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only performance of the system.
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by • Keep the path under the front seats clear of
pressing the button again or by turning off the objects to help circulate the air inside of
engine. your vehicle more effectively.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview
mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defog button is pressed.
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar to the defogger grid.
210
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
Indicators gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will When one of the warning lights comes on and
help you locate them. stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
Warning lights and gages can signal that
the section that tells you what to do about
something is wrong before it becomes serious
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
enough to cause an expensive repair or
do repairs can be costly – and even dangerous. So
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
please get to know your warning lights and
lights and gages could also save you or others
gages. They are a big help.
from injury.
Your vehicle also has a message center that
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
works along with the warning lights and gages.
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
See Message Center on page 225.
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
211
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll
know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive
safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
United States up-level shown, United States base-level and Canadian similar
212
Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour can also display a trip odometer. The display can
(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle be toggled between the odometer and the trip
has been driven, in either miles (used in the odometer by quickly pressing and releasing the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). trip/reset button located to the right of the
However, a Canadian odometer will remain temperature gage. The trip odometer will continue
in metric units only. to keep track of miles or kilometers driven even if
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. they are not currently displayed. A Canadian trip
odometer will remain in metric units only. To reset
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle the trip odometer to zero (0), push and hold the
needs a new odometer installed. If the new one trip/reset button for at least one and a half seconds,
can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, but less than three seconds. The trip odometer that
then that will be done. If it cannot, then it is set is showing in the display will be reset.
at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Information Center (DIC), you may toggle the
odometer to display either miles, available only in
the United States, or kilometers. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 235.
213
Retro-Active Reset Tachometer
The trip odometer has a feature called retro-active
reset. This feature can be used to set the trip The tachometer displays
odometer to the number of miles or kilometers the engine speed in
driven since the ignition was last turned on. This revolutions per
can be used if you forget to reset your trip odometer minute (rpm).
at the beginning of a trip. To use the retro-active
reset feature, push and hold the trip/reset button for
at least five seconds. The trip odometer will then
display the number of miles or kilometers driven
since the ignition was last turned on and you began
driving. If you use the retro-active reset feature after
you have started the vehicle, but before you begin
moving, the display will show the number of miles
or kilometers you drove during the last ignition
cycle. Once you begin driving, the trip odometer will
accumulate mileage. For example, if you have
driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started your
vehicle, and then activate the retro-active reset
feature, the display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As
you drive, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles
(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
214
Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime There is an airbag readiness light on the
will come on for several seconds to remind instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
people to fasten their safety belts. The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
The safety belt light will is an electrical problem. The system check
also come on and stay includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,
on for several the wiring, diagnostic module, and safety belt
seconds, then it will pretensioners. For more information on the airbag
flash for several more. system, see Airbag System on page 88. For
more information on safety belt pretensioners, see
Safety Belt Pretensioners on page 56.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in motion, the chime
and the safety belt light will be repeated. You
should buckle your safety belt. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
215
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash {CAUTION:
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go If the airbag readiness light stays on after
out. This means the you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system is ready. system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, a crash, or they could even inflate without
your airbag system or safety belt pretensioners a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced or others, have your vehicle serviced right
right away. away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
216
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of the right
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag
status indicator. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
United States
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
Canada because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START, inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
the passenger airbag status indicator will light child restraint in the right front passenger’s
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, seat if the airbag is turned on.
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
217
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
in the front.” This is because the risk to the sensing system. See your dealer for service.
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
Even though the passenger sensing
readiness light ever come on together, it
system is designed to turn off the
means that something may be wrong with
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
system is failsafe, and no one can
because an adult-size person sitting in the
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
right front passenger seat may not have
under some unusual circumstance, even
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
though it is turned off. We recommend
Airbag Readiness Light on page 215.
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the

airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 98 for more on this,
including important safety information.
218
Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
light will come on when you set your parking there is a problem.
brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake
does not release fully. If it stays on after your If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
parking brake is fully released, it means you have
that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may
a brake problem.
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System
part can still work and stop you. For good Warning Light on page 220 and Towing Your
braking, though, you need both parts working well. Vehicle on page 337.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away. {CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
United States Canada the vehicle towed for service.
219
Anti-Lock Brake System The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light
Warning Light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light
Your vehicle may have an Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) warning light. If it does, the light should come
on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key
to ON. If the ABS warning light stays on longer than United States Canada
normal after you have started your engine, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on and stays on when
you are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, the ABS needs service
and you do not have anti-lock brakes.
220
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
(TCS) warning light. The TCS warning light
may come on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the TCS off by pressing the TRAC
OFF button located in the instrument panel
switchbank the TCS warning light will come on
and stay on. To turn the system back on,
press the button again. The TCS warning light
should go off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 310 for more information.
• If there is an engine-related and brake system
problem that is specifically related to traction United States Canada
control, the TCS will turn off and the TCS
warning light will come on. This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on If the gage pointer moves near the “H”, your
for an extended period of time when the system is engine is too hot!
turned on, your vehicle needs service. It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 378.
221
Malfunction Indicator Lamp prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
Service Engine Soon Light in the technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
United States or Check Engine Light in Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle
Canada with this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
United States Canada of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Your vehicle has a computer which monitors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control your vehicle’s emission controls and may
systems. cause this light to come on. Modifications to
This system is called OBD II (On-Board these systems could lead to costly repairs not
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended covered by your warranty. This may also
to assure that emissions are at acceptable result in a failure to pass a required Emission
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE and Modifications on page 354.
SOON or check engine light comes on to indicate
that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may
222
This light should come on, as a check to show If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
engine is not running. If the light does not If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
come on, have it repaired. This light will also so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
emissions and may damage the emission following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
service may be required. soon as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control If the Light Is On Steady
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be You may be able to correct the emission system
required. malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If the Light Is Flashing
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The following may prevent more serious damage install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 359.
to your vehicle: The diagnostic system can determine if the
• Reducing vehicle speed fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
• Avoiding steep uphill grades with the cap properly installed should turn the
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of light off.
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
223
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of If none of the above steps have made the light
water? turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
condition will usually be corrected when the diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips problems that may have developed.
should turn the light off. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Have you recently changed brands of fuel? Programs
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. Some state/provincial and local governments have
See Gasoline Octane on page 356. Poor fuel or may begin programs to inspect the emission
quality will cause your engine not to run as control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as this inspection could prevent you from getting a
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put vehicle registration.
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These Here are some things you need to know in order
conditions may go away once the engine is to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
and cause the light to turn on. SERVICE ENGINE SOON or check engine light is
If you experience one or more of these conditions, on or not working properly.
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
light off. critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
224
This can happen if you have recently replaced your If your fuel is low, the warning message in the
battery or if your battery has run down. The message center will come on. See Low Fuel
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical Warning Message on page 232.
emission control systems during normal driving. Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you
This may take several days of routine driving. If you have left when the ignition is on.
have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, Here are four things that some owners ask about.
your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. All these things are normal and do not indicate
that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
Fuel Gage • At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up
than the gage reads. For example, the
gage reads half full, but it took more (or less)
than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the
ignition is turned off.
United States Canada Message Center

When the indicator nears empty, you still have a The message center is located at the top of the
little fuel left, but you should get more soon. instrument panel cluster in between the tachometer
and speedometer. It gives you important safety
and maintenance facts.
225
Passenger Seatbelt Reminder Service Traction System Warning
Message Message
If your vehicle has the
passenger sensing
system, this message
reminds the passenger
to buckle their
seatbelt.
This message will come on and a chime will
sound when the following conditions exist: If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS) and this message is displayed when you are
• The ignition is ON,
driving, there may be a problem with your TCS.
• the passenger’s seatbelt is not buckled, Your vehicle may need service.
• a passenger is detected by the passenger When this message is displayed, the TCS will not
sensing system. limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This light and chime will be repeated if the If there is an engine-related and brake system
ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, problem that is specifically related to traction
the passenger is still unbuckled and the control, the TCS will turn off and the warning
passenger airbag is enabled. You should message will come on.
buckle your seatbelt. If the passenger’s
seatbelt is already buckled, this message and If the TCS warning message comes on and stays
chime will not come on. on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
226
Traction Active Message Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Message

If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), the TRACTION ACTIVE message will This message will come on when your engine gets
appear when the TCS is limiting wheel spin. You too hot.
may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal. If this message comes on, it means that your
engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message operating your vehicle under normal driving
appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
This message will stay on for a few seconds after vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as
the TCS stops limiting wheel spin. possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 378.
227
Charging System Indicator Message Reduced Engine Power Message
The charging system
battery symbol will
come on in the message
center when you turn
on the ignition as
a check to show you it
is working.
It will remain on as long as the engine is not
running. It should go out once the engine If your vehicle has this feature, this message will
is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you appear in the message center when a noticeable
are driving, you may have a problem with the reduction in the vehicle’s engine performance
charging system. It could indicate that you have is detected. This message will also appear when
problems with a generator drive belt, or another your vehicle is in overheated engine protection
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. operating mode. See Engine Overheating on
Driving while this indicator appears in the message page 378 for more information.
center could drain your battery. If this message comes on and stays on, see your
If you must drive a short distance with the dealer.
message on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
228
Low Oil Pressure Message
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Your vehicle may have a low oil pressure warning
message.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
Your oil pressure message lets you know when may damage the engine. The repairs would
you may have a problem with your engine oil not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
pressure. the maintenance schedule in this manual for
When the engine is running and this message changing engine oil.
appears, the engine oil level may be too low.
There may also be another problem causing low
oil pressure.
229
Change Engine Oil Message Door Ajar Warning Message
United States Canada United States Canada
When this message comes on and stays on after This message will come on when the ignition is
you have started the engine, it means that turned to ON or START and the driver’s or
service is required for your vehicle. See Scheduled passenger’s door is open.
Maintenance on page 475 and Engine Oil on
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message

This message will come on when the ignition is
turned to ON or START and the liftgate is open.
230
Check Gas Cap Message Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced by your
If your vehicle has this dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
message, it will come PASS-Key® III system at this time. See
on when the ignition PASS-Key® III on page 124 for more information.
is turned to ON or
START and the gas cap
Low Washer Fluid Warning
is open. Message
PASS-Key® III Security Message

Your vehicle may have a low washer fluid warning
message. If your washer fluid is low, this warning
United States Canada message will come on and stay on until you
add washer fluid. See Windshield Washer Fluid on
If you are ever driving and this message comes page 388 for adding washer fluid instructions.
on and stays on, you will be able to restart If the warning message is still on after adding fluid,
your engine if you turn it off. you need to reset the warning message. To
reset the warning message, turn the ignition off
and then back on. If the message stays on,
see your dealer.
231
Low Fuel Warning Message Low Brake Fluid Warning Message
If your fuel is low, the warning message will come If your brake fluid is low, the warning message will
on and stay on until you add fuel. come on and stay on until you add brake fluid.
If the warning message is still on after adding fuel, The brake system warning light will also be
you need to reset the warning message. To illuminated.
reset the warning message, turn the ignition off If this message appears, the brakes need
and then back on. If the message stays on, attention. You should have your vehicle serviced
see your dealer. immediately. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 219 and Brakes on page 389.
If the warning message is still on after adding
fluid, you may need to reset the warning message.
To reset the warning message, turn the ignition
off and then back on. If the message stays on, see
your dealer right away.
232
Service Vehicle Soon Message Program Mode Message
This light will come on if your vehicle has certain If you receive this message, your vehicle is in
non-emission related problems. program mode. If your vehicle has the Driver
For example, if the entire electrical system fails to Information Center (DIC), you are ready to begin
send and receive messages from the vehicle’s programming your vehicle’s customization
components, this message will come on. features. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
These problems may not be obvious and may
affect vehicle performance or durability. Consult a
qualified dealership for necessary repairs to
maintain top vehicle performance.
233
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Parking Lamp Warning Message
Battery Low Warning Message

If this message appears, one or both of the
If you receive this message, the battery in the vehicle’s parking lamp bulbs needs replacement.
remote keyless entry needs to be replaced. See See Bulb Replacement on page 399 for bulb
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless replacement instructions.
Entry System Operation on page 111 for
instructions.
234
Highbeam Out Warning Message The DIC is capable of displaying English or
French. To change the language, press and hold
the MODE button until the language you want
is displayed. The MODE button is located on the
instrument panel, to the left of the steering
column. Release the button to set your choice.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 236
to change the display from English to metric.
United States Canada The DIC contains a compass display to show you
which direction the vehicle is driving. See DIC
If this message appears, one or both of the Compass on page 238 for more information.
vehicle’s high-beam headlamp bulbs needs
replacement. See Bulb Replacement on page 399
Driver Information Center (DIC)

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), the display is located on the instrument
panel cluster in the tachometer gage. The DIC will
show information about the vehicle and the
surroundings.
235
DIC Controls and Displays The DIC will be in the last mode displayed when
the engine was turned off. To select a different
When the ignition is turned to ON or START, the mode, press MODE. The display will cycle through
DIC will display the following: its options at each press of MODE.
BUICK: BUICK will be displayed for three MODE: This button lets you cycle through the
seconds. options on the display.
DRIVER #: This message will be displayed for SET: This button is used to select and set the
another three seconds after BUICK appears in the options to your preference.
display. The driver number corresponds to the
numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the Remote The DIC will always display the compass reading
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters. This display lets and the outside temperature. If the temperature
the driver know which driver’s RKE transmitter is below 38°F (3°C), the temperature reading will
is being used and the driver’s customization toggle between displaying the temperature and
features. the word ICE for two minutes.
AVG ECONOMY (Average Economy): Average
The DIC controls are fuel economy is viewed as a long term
located to the left of the approximation of your overall driving conditions.
steering column on To learn the average fuel economy from a
the instrument panel. new starting point, press and hold the SET button
while the average fuel economy is displayed on
the DIC. The average fuel economy will set
to zero.
236
INST ECONOMY (Instant Economy): Instant fuel AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average
economy reflects the fuel economy that the speed display will show your average speed from
vehicle has right now. Instant fuel economy varies when you first started your vehicle. To reset
with your driving conditions, such as acceleration, the average speed, press and hold the SET button
braking and the grade of the road being while the average speed is displayed on the
traveled. Unlike average fuel economy, instant fuel DIC and until the speed resets to your current
economy cannot be reset. speed.
FUEL RANGE: The fuel range is an estimated OIL LIFE LEFT HOLD SET TO RESET: This
distance that your vehicle can travel on the message displays the current percentage of the oil
remaining fuel. The fuel economy used to calculate life by the engine oil life system. Be careful not
the range is based on your driving history since to reset this display other than when the oil
the last reset of the average speed. has been changed. See “How to Reset the Engine
Oil Life System” under Engine Oil Life System
FUEL USED: The fuel used display will show you on page 368 for more information.
how much fuel has been used since the last
time it was reset. To reset the fuel used to zero, In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
press and hold the SET button while the fuel used the oil life, additional maintenance is
is displayed on the DIC and until the display recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
goes to zero. manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 475 and Engine Oil on page 365.
237
TIRE PRESSURE: The check tire pressure DIC Compass
system can alert you to a large change in the
pressure of one tire. If the tire pressure is normal, Your vehicle has a compass in the Driver
TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL will display. If the Information Center (DIC).
tire pressure is low, LOW TIRE PRESSURE will
display. You must begin driving before the
Compass Variance
system will detect a low tire pressure condition. Compass variance is the difference between
See Check Tire Pressure System on page 414. magnetic north and geographic north. In some
areas of the country, the difference is great enough
USE SET TO SELECT ENGLISH METRIC: You to cause the compass to give false readings. If
can use this display to select English or metric. this occurs, the compass must be recalibrated.
Press the SET button to toggle between English or
metric. The DIC, the odometer, the trip odometer Compass Calibration
and head-up display will change. A Canadian
If the calibration required symbol, or C, appears in
odometer and trip odometer will remain in metric
the compass, you must manually put the
units only.
compass into the calibration mode. To enter this
OFF: No driver information will be displayed in mode, do the following:
this mode. If the DIC is left in this mode for more 1. Turn the ignition on and press the MODE
than three seconds, the display will turn off. button until CALIBRATE COMPASS
Press the MODE button to start the DIC. displays.
2. Press and hold the SET button for longer than
three seconds.
238
zone number for compass variance will be
displayed in place of the zone symbol. Press the
SET button to select the zone number from the
graphic shown to select the current area of the
country in which you are driving.
PRESS SET TO CALIBRATE COMPASS: After
selecting your zone, press the MODE button and
this will be displayed on the DIC. Press and hold the
SET button and complete three 360 degree turns in
an area free from large metal objects at a speed no
faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The following two messages will toggle in the
display until you calibrate the compass:
• DRIVE VEHICLE IN CIRCLE
• CALIBRATING COMPASS
ZONE - - PRESS & HOLD SET TO CHANGE:
When calibration is complete, the vehicle direction
This display mode will appear when you are
will be displayed instead of the C symbol.
manually calibrating the system. When the
compass is being recalibrated for the first time, the
zone symbol will be displayed. When the compass
is being recalibrated any time after that, the current
239
DIC Vehicle Personalization If your vehicle does not have a DIC, you do not
have available the vehicle customization features
The DIC is used to program the choices of using the RKE transmitter.
two drivers. The drivers are recognized as
DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 in the DIC display. You Entering Programming Mode
will let the DIC know which driver you are by using To program features, your vehicle must be in the
your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. programming mode. Do the following:
Each RKE transmitter was pre-programmed
to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 and the 1. Turn the ignition key to ON with the vehicle in
corresponding numbers, 1 or 2, appear on PARK (P).
the back of the transmitters. Each transmitter may To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
be programmed differently for each driver’s recommended that the headlamps are
preferences (lights, doors, horn, or activate the turned off.
programmed radio stations for driver 1 or driver 2) 2. Press and release the MODE button, scrolling
using your RKE transmitter. through the DIC messages, until
After you press the LOCK button on your RKE PERSONALIZATION PRESS SET TO BEGIN
transmitter and the ignition key is in ON, the DIC is displayed.
will display the identified driver number. The 3. Press the SET button and TO SELECT
vehicle will also recall the vehicle customization DRIVER PRESS REMOTE LOCK will appear.
features that were last programmed to correspond Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
to your RKE transmitter. Entry (RKE) transmitter. This identifies which
If you unlock your vehicle using your key instead RKE transmitter is being programmed by
of your RKE transmitter, the DIC will not change displaying PERSONALIZATION FOR
drivers and your vehicle will recall the information DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
from the last transmitter used.
240
30: The headlamps and parking lamps will stay
on for 30 seconds when the ignition is turned
to OFF.
to OFF.
United States Canada Your vehicle was originally programmed to
30 second mode. The mode may have been
4. The program mode message will appear in changed since then. To determine the current
the message center as an indication that mode, or to change the mode, do the following:
your vehicle is ready to begin programming. 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
5. Follow the instructions given by the DIC. Programming Mode” listed previously.
2. Press the MODE button until HEADLMP EXIT
Headlamp Exit Delay DELAY appears in the DIC.
This feature allows you to customize the 3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
headlamps and parking lamps. This feature can the mode you prefer.
be programmed to one of the following modes:
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not exit programming mode by following the
turn on at the same instant that the ignition is instructions later in this section or program the
turned to OFF. next feature available on your vehicle.
to OFF.
241
Interior Lighting Delay Your vehicle was originally programmed to ON.
The mode may have been changed since then.
The interior lighting delay feature can be To determine the current mode, or to change
programmed to one of the following modes: the mode, do the following:
OFF: This feature will not illuminate the interior of 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
your vehicle when all of the doors are closed. Programming Mode” listed previously.
ON: This feature will continue to illuminate 2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR
the interior lamps for 25 seconds after all doors LIGHTING DELAY appears on the DIC.
have been closed so that you can find the ignition 3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
and buckle your safety belt at night. ON or OFF.
Interior lighting delay will not occur while the The mode you selected is now set. You can either
ignition is in ON. After 25 seconds, the interior exit programming mode by following the
lamps will fade out. The lamps will fade out before instructions later in this section or program the
the 25 seconds if one of the following occurs: next feature available on your vehicle.
• The ignition is turned to ON
• All doors are locked using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
• There is no occupant activity detected for an
illumination period of 25 seconds
242
Interior Lighting On Your vehicle was originally programmed to DOOR.
The interior lighting on feature can be programmed To determine the current mode, or to change
to one of the following modes: the mode, do the following:
KEY OUT: The interior lamps will come on for 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key Programming Mode” listed previously.
from the ignition. 2. Press the MODE button until INTERIOR
DOOR: The interior lamps will come on for about LIGHTING ON appears on the DIC.
25 seconds when any door is opened. 3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
Interior lighting on will not occur while the ignition KEY OUT or DOOR.
is in ON. After 25 seconds, the interior lamps The mode you selected is now set. You can either
will fade out. The lamps will fade out before the exit programming mode by following the
25 seconds if one of the following occurs: instructions later in this section or program the
• The ignition is turned to ON next feature available on your vehicle.
• LOCK is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter
• There is no occupant activity detected for an
illumination period of 25 seconds
243
Auto Door Lock/Unlock If the auto door unlock feature has been
programmed to DRIVER or ALL, the automatic
The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle door unlock feature can also be programmed
is shifted out of PARK (P). For automatic to one of the following modes:
unlocking, you can program your vehicle to one of
the following modes: PARK: Unlock when the shift lever is put in
PARK (P).
OFF: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), the
doors will not unlock automatically. KEY OUT: Unlock when the ignition key is
removed.
DRIVER: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), Your vehicle was originally programmed to PARK.
only the driver’s door will unlock. The mode may have been changed since then.
ALL: When the shift lever is put in PARK (P), all To determine the current mode, or to change
the mode, do the following:
doors will unlock.
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. Programming Mode” listed previously.
2. Follow the instructions for programming AUTO
To determine the current mode, or to change
DOOR UNLOCK to DRIVER or ALL listed
the mode, do the following:
previously.
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering 3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR
Programming Mode” listed previously. UNLOCK/PARK KEYOUT appears on the DIC.
2. Make sure that the AUTO DOOR LOCK 4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
feature is programmed to ON. PARK or KEY OUT.
3. Press the MODE button until AUTO DOOR The mode you selected is now set. You can either
UNLOCK appears on the DIC. exit programming mode by following the
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before instructions later in this section or program the next
OFF, DRIVER or ALL. feature available on your vehicle.
244
Delayed Locking OFF: The doors will always lock immediately
when you lock the doors using the power door lock
The delayed locking feature can be programmed switch or press LOCK on the RKE transmitter.
to one of the following modes:
Your vehicle was originally programmed to
ON: Lock your vehicle using the power door ON. The mode may have been changed since
lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) then. To determine the current mode, or to change
transmitter while any door is opened, you will the mode, do the following:
hear three chimes and the doors will not lock. 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors Programming Mode” listed previously.
will lock.
2. Press the MODE button until DELAYED
Once delayed locking is programmed to ON, you LOCKING appears on the DIC.
can do the following:
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
• Cancel the delayed locking by pressing unlock ON or OFF.
using the power door lock switch or by fully
inserting the key in the ignition The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit programming mode by following the
• Override the delayed locking feature by instructions later in this section or program the
pressing lock immediately using the power next feature available on your vehicle.
door lock switch
• Let the delayed locking feature complete the
locking of the vehicle
245
Remote Door Unlock The mode you selected is now set. You can either
The remote door unlock feature can be instructions later in this section or program the
programmed to one of the following modes: next feature available on your vehicle.
DRIVER/ALL: With the first press of UNLOCK on Unlock Feedback
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
the driver’s door will unlock, and with the second The unlock feedback feature can be programmed
press of UNLOCK, within five seconds of the to one of the following modes:
first press, all passenger’s doors will unlock.
LIGHTS: This mode does the following:
ALL: All doors will unlock with every press of • During the day, when the ignition is in OFF
UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter. and UNLOCK on the Remote Keyless Entry
Your vehicle was originally programmed to ALL. (RKE) transmitter is pressed, the headlamps
The mode may have been changed since then. and parking lamps will flash.
To determine the current mode, or to change • During the night, when the ignition is in OFF,
the mode, do the following: the headlamps and parking lamps will be
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering activated for 30 seconds when UNLOCK is
Programming Mode” listed previously. pressed on the RKE transmitter. If you would
like to change the amount of time the
2. Press the MODE button until REMOTE DOOR
lamps stay on, change the headlamp exit
UNLOCK appears on the DIC.
delay feature.
DRIVER/ALL or ALL. OFF: The headlamps and parking lamps will not
flash when UNLOCK is pressed on the RKE
transmitter.
246
Your vehicle was originally programmed to Lock Feedback
LIGHTS. The mode may have been changed
since then. To determine the current mode, or to The lock feedback feature can be programmed to
change the mode, do the following: one of the following modes:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering OFF: When LOCK is pressed on the Remote
Programming Mode” listed previously. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the headlamps
2. Follow the instructions for programming and parking lamps will not flash and the horn
HEADLMP EXIT DELAY earlier in this section, will not sound.
to make sure which mode it is programmed to. LIGHTS: When LOCK is pressed on the RKE
3. Press the MODE button until UNLOCK transmitter, the headlamps and parking lamps will
FEEDBACK appears on the DIC. flash briefly.
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before LIGHTS and HORN: When LOCK is pressed a
LIGHTS or OFF. second time on the RKE transmitter within
5. Press the MODE button until you have five seconds, the headlamps and parking lamps
determined which mode you prefer, to will flash briefly and the horn will sound.
follow with the personalization.
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
247
Your vehicle was originally programmed to OFF: No memory seat position will be recalled
LIGHTS and HORN. The mode may have been when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE
changed since then. To determine the current transmitter.
mode, or to change the mode, do the following: To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering programmed or to program your vehicle to a
Programming Mode” listed previously. different mode, do the following:
2. Press the MODE button until LOCK 1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
FEEDBACK appears on the DIC. Programming Mode” listed previously.
3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before 2. Press the MODE button until SEAT RECALL
OFF, LIGHTS or LIGHTS and HORN. appears on the DIC.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either 3. Press the SET button until the arrow is before
exit programming mode by following the ON or OFF.
instructions later in this section or program the If the seat recall feature has been programmed to
next feature available on your vehicle. ON, the seat recall feature can also be
Seat Recall programmed to one of the following modes:
MEMORY: The position recalled will be the
The seat recall feature can be programmed to one
memory driving position.
of the following modes:
ON: The previously programmed memory seat
position will be recalled when the UNLOCK button
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
248
EXIT: The position recalled will be the previously Tilt Mirror
programmed exit position.
The tilt mirror feature can be programmed to one
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is of the following modes:
programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, do the following: ON: The passenger’s side outside rearview mirror
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering will tilt down towards the curb when the vehicle
Programming Mode” listed previously. is shifted to REVERSE (R) and returns to its
2. Follow the instructions for programming SEAT previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of
RECALL to ON listed previously. REVERSE (R).
3. Press the MODE button until RECALL OFF: The mirror will not tilt.
POSITION appears on the DIC.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
4. Press the SET button until the arrow is before programmed or to program your vehicle to a
MEMORY or EXIT. different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering
Programming Mode” listed previously.
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle. 2. Press the MODE button until TILT MIRROR
appears on the DIC.
ON or OFF.
The mode you selected is now set. You can exit
programming mode by following the instructions
next in this section.
249
Exiting Programming Mode Audio System(s)
To exit programming mode, do one of the Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
following: read the pages following to familiarize yourself
• Shift out of PARK (P). with its features.
• Turn the ignition key out of ON. Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
• Do not program any commands for one safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
minute while in the programming mode. page 302. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
The programming mode message will turn off to audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
let you know that you are no longer in the well as take advantage of its features. While your
programming mode. vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
Once you have reached the end of the presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
personalization features, PERSONALIZATION tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
SELECTION DONE will appear briefly. Then driving conditions permit, you can tune to
PRESS SET TO EXIT MODE TO CONTINUE will your favorite stations using the presets and
appear. Pressing SET will exit you out of the steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
DIC. Pressing MODE will take you to the beginning
of personalization.
250
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
{CAUTION: adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
This system provides you with a far radio stations using the presets and steering
greater access to audio stations and song wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
listings. Giving extended attention to
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
entertainment tasks while driving can
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
cause a crash and you or others can be player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
injured or killed. Always keep your eyes radio, make sure that it can be added by
on the road and your mind on the checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
drive — avoid engaging in extended rules covering mobile radio and telephone
searching while driving. units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
Driving on page 302. may interfere with the operation of sound
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid equipment that has been added.
distraction while driving. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
While your vehicle is parked: Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. (RAP) on page 129 for more information.
251
Setting the Time Radio with CD
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on
the display. AM will appear for morning hours.
Press and hold M until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time can be set with the
ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)
information, press and hold H and M at the same
time until TIME UPDATED appears on the
display. If the time is not available from the station,
NO UPDATE will appear on the display.
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning
to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a few The audio system has a Radio Data System
minutes for the time to update. (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
252
With RDS, your radio can do the following: XM™ Satellite Radio Service
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
type of programming the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
• Receive announcements concerning local and XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
national emergencies channels including music, news, sports, talk,
• Display messages from radio stations traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements audio and text information that includes song title
This system relies upon receiving specific and artist name. A service fee is required in
information from these stations and only works order to receive the XM™ service. For more
when the information is available. In rare cases, a information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
radio station can broadcast incorrect information www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
that can cause the radio features to work or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
station.
Playing the Radio
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the on and off.
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
programming, and the name of the program being
decrease the volume.
broadcast.
253
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button
your audio system adjusts automatically to while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
make up for road and wind noise as you drive. categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
To get to SCV, push the TUNE/AUDIO knob
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
repeatedly until SPEED VOL (volume) displays.
Turn the TUNE/AUDIO knob to select MIN To change the default on the display, press the
(minimum), MED (medium), or MAX (maximum). DISP button until the desired display appears, then
Each higher setting allows for more volume hold the button until the display flashes. The
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as selected display becomes the default.
you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any Finding a Station
speed. The volume level should always sound BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
the same to you as you drive. To turn SCV FM2, or AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
off, press SCV until OFF displays. selection displays.
DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. Press this button to display the time © SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go
when the ignition is turned off. to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
For RDS, press the DISP (display) button to To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
change what appears on the display while using for two seconds until SCAN displays. The radio
RDS. The display options are station, RDS station goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
frequency, PTY (program type), and the name goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow
of the program (if available). again to stop scanning.
254
To scan preset stations, press and hold either 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
SEEK arrow for more than four seconds until pushbuttons until you hear a beep. When
PSCAN and the preset number displays. You will that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
hear two beeps. The radio goes to the first preset the station that was set, returns and the
station stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a few equalization that was selected is stored for
seconds, then goes to the next preset station. Press that pushbutton.
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Setting Preset Stations
AUDIO: Push and release this knob until BASS,
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, MID (midrange), or TREBLE displays. Then
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be turn the AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by the tone. If a station is weak or has static,
performing the following steps: decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then
XM1 or XM2. push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
3. Tune in the desired station. until you hear a beep. BASS and a zero, MID
and a zero, or TREBLE and a zero displays.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
255
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
controls to the middle position, first exit the audio select BAL or FADE. Then push and hold the
mode by waiting five seconds without making AUDIO knob for more than two seconds until you
any changes. Then push and hold the AUDIO knob hear a beep. The indicator is centered on the
for more than two seconds until you hear a display.
beep. ALL CENTERED displays.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select controls to the middle position, first exit the audio
customized equalization settings designed for mode by waiting five seconds without making
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and any changes. Then push and hold the AUDIO knob
classical. for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
ALL CENTERED displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the (RDS and XM™)
right and the left speakers, push and release the
AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays. To select and find a desired PTY perform the
Then turn the AUDIO knob to move the sound following:
toward the right or the left speakers. A bar graph 1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select
with indicators shows how the sound is balanced. mode. The PTY symbol displays.
To adjust the fade between the front and the 2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
rear speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press either
until FADE displays. Then turn the AUDIO
SEEK arrow to select the PTY to go to the
knob to move the sound toward the front or the
PTY’s first station.
rear speakers. A bar graph with indicators shows
how the sound is balanced.
256
4. To go to another station within that PTY while 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK hold either SEEK arrow. The radio begins
arrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, press scanning the stations in the PTY.
either SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY 4. Press either SEEK arrow to stop at a station.
and then to go to another station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scans
5. Press P-TYP to exit the program type, for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
select mode. announcements.
If the PTY times out and is no longer displays,
go back to Step 1. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger
If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radio station with the same program type. To turn
searches for stations with the selected PTY alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
and traffic announcements. two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
performing the following: To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
mode. The PTY symbol displays. The radio does not switch to other stations.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY. This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
257
RDS Messages TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements. Press
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
this button to receive the traffic announcement
emergencies. When an alert announcement
from the station. TRAF displays between brackets.
comes on the current radio station, ALERT!
You receive a traffic announcement when the
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if
tuned radio station broadcasts one.
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements cannot be turned off. announcements, press the TRAF button and the
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
broadcast system. This feature is not supported that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the
by all RDS stations. radio stops seeking and TRAF displays between
brackets. If no station is found that broadcasts
INFO (Information): If the current station has a traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
message, INFO displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message can display the If only the brackets display, press the TRAF button
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. to remove the brackets or use the TUNE knob or
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the the SEEK arrows to go to a station that broadcasts
message appears every three seconds. To scroll traffic announcements. If no station is found that
through the message, press and release the INFO broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC
button. A new group of words displays after each displays.
press of the button. Once the complete message The radio plays the traffic announcements if the
has displayed, INFO disappears from the display volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD
until another new message is received. The last if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
message can be displayed by pressing the INFO announcements and the brackets are displayed.
button. The last message can be viewed until a new
message is received or you tune to a different This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
station. Radio Service.
258
Radio Messages If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
CAL (CALIBRATE): The audio system has been or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
CAL appears on the display it means that the radio source.
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
and must be returned to your dealer for service.
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
LOCKED: This message displays when the and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the manner.
vehicle to your dealer for service. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
be corrected, contact your dealer. recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
Radio Messages for XM™ Only handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
See XM Radio Messages on page 276 later in this difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
section for further detail. and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
Playing a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
playing. If you want to insert a CD while the and DVDs on page 298 for more information.
ignition or the radio is off, first press the eject or If there is no apparent damage, try a known
DISP button. good CD.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
259
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught 4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
personal computer and a description label is order. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen. EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select an
equalization setting while playing a CD. The
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert equalization is set whenever a CD is played. See
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or “EQ” listed previously for more information.
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the © SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition start of the current track if it has played more than
without any label, load one CD at a time, and eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed
foreign materials, liquids, and debris. more than once, the player continues moving
backward or forward through the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section. To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for two seconds until SCAN displays and you
1s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton will hear a beep. The CD goes to the next track,
to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
sound at a reduced volume. Release this track. The sound mutes and SCAN and the track
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time number displays while scanning. The CD only
of the track displays. scans forward. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
2 \ (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
260
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which CD Messages
track is playing. Press it again within five seconds
to see how long it has been playing. To change CHECK CD: If this message displays, it could for
the default on the display, track or elapsed one of the following reasons:
time, press this button until you see the display • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
you want, then hold the button until the display normal, the CD should play.
flashes. The selected display is now the default.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio 3When the road becomes smoother, the CD
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains should play.
safely inside the radio for future listening. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening upside down.
to the radio. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD. The
CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, • There could have been a problem while
after 25 seconds, the CD automatically pulls back burning the CD.
into the player. If the CD is pushed back into • The label could be caught in the CD player.
the player, before the 25 second time period is If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
complete, the player senses an error and tries to other reason, try a known good CD.
eject the CD several times before stopping.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
Eject can be activated with either the ignition or be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
radio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition displays an error message, write it down
or radio off, if this button is pressed first. and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
261
Listening to a DVD Radio with Six-Disc CD
Your vehicle may have a Rear Seat Entertainment
System (RSE), see Rear Seat Entertainment
System on page 277 for more information. If your
vehicle has this system and a DVD is playing,
the DVD symbol displays indicating that the DVD
is available and can be listened to through the
vehicles speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the
CD button until RSE displays. The current
source stops and the DVD sound comes through
the speakers. To stop listening to the DVD,
press the CD button to play a CD, or press the
BAND button to select a different source. Radio Data System (RDS)
When the RSE system is turned off, the radio The audio system has a Radio Data System
displays RSE OFF and the radio returns to the last (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
selected audio source that you were listening to. FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
262
This system relies upon receiving specific www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
information from these stations and only works or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
when the information is available. In rare cases, a 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that can cause the radio features to work Playing the Radio
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
station. on and off.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the decrease the volume.
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
programming, and the name of the program being volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
broadcast. to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in button to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. or MAX (maximum). Each higher setting allows for
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast more volume compensation at faster vehicle
channels including music, news, sports, talk, speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome
programming. XM™ provides digital quality noise at any speed. The volume level should
audio and text information that includes song title always sound the same to you as you drive. To
and artist name. A service fee is required in turn automatic volume off, press this button
order to receive the XM™ service. For more until OFF displays.
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
263
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to
display between the radio station frequency and go to the next or to the previous station and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this stay there.
knob to display the time.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
For RDS, press the RCL knob to change what that are in the selected band.
appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program for two seconds until SC displays and a beep
(if available). sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
For XM™ (if equipped), press the RCL knob while either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
in XM mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or To scan preset stations, press and hold either
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, SCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET
Channel Number/Channel Name. SCAN displays and a double beep sounds. The
radio goes to the first preset station stored on the
To change the default on the display, press the pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then
RCL knob until you see the display you want, then goes to the next preset station. Press either SCAN
hold the knob until the display flashes. The arrow again to stop scanning presets.
selected display becomes the default.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
Finding a Station that are in the selected band.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
display shows the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
264
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
(midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. Turn the
performing the following steps:
knob to increase or to decrease the tone. If a station
1. Turn the radio on. is weak or has static, decrease the treble.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
or XM2. position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and
3. Tune in the desired station. hold the AUDIO knob. The display level adjusts to
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. the middle position and a beep sounds.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. When that middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station when no tone or speaker control is displayed.
that was set, returns and the equalization that CENTERED displays and one beep sounds.
was selected is stored for that pushbutton. AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO
EQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manually
adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
265
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
(RDS and XM™)
right and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob To select and find a desired PTY perform the
until BAL (balance) displays. Turn the knob to following:
move the sound toward the right or the left 1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
speakers. type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
To adjust the fade between the front and rear selected PTY displays.
speakers, push and hold the AUDIO knob 2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
until FAD displays. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers. 3. Once the desired PTY displays, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to go to the PTY’s
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle first station.
position, select balance or fade and push and 4. To go to another station within that PTY while
hold the AUDIO knob. The display level adjusts to the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK
the middle position and a beep sounds. arrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the either SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob and then to go to another station.
when no tone or speaker controls are displayed. 5. Press P-TYPE to exit the program type
CENTERED displays and one beep sounds. select mode.
If PTY times out and no longer displays, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected PTY and
traffic announcements.
266
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
the P-TYPE button until a beep sounds on the two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
PTY you want to interrupt with. When selected, an switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
asterisk appears beside that PTY on the display.
You can select multiple interrupts if desired. While To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
you are listening to a CD, the last selected RDS BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
station interrupts play if that selected program type The radio does not switch to other stations.
format is broadcast. This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following: Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
selected PTY displays. programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. performing the following steps:
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press and 1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio 2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
begins scanning the stations in the PTY. type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station. selected PTY displays.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
scans for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenever
announcements.
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate that was set will return.
frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
station with the same program type. To turn
267
RDS Messages TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national station broadcasts traffic announcements.
emergencies. When an alert announcement To receive the traffic announcement from the
comes on the current radio station, ALERT! tuned station, press this button. TRAF displays
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if between brackets. You receive a traffic
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is announcement when the tuned radio station
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert broadcasts one.
announcements cannot be turned off. If the current tuned station does not broadcast
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency traffic announcements, press the TRAF button and
broadcast system. This feature is not supported the radio seeks to a station that does. When a
by all RDS stations. station that broadcasts traffic announcements is
found, the radio stops seeking and TRAF displays
INFO (Information): If the current station has a between brackets. If no station is found, NO
message, INFO displays. Press this button to TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
see the message. The message can display the
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go
message appears every three seconds. To scroll to a station that supports traffic announcements.
through the message, press and release the INFO If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
button. A new group of words displays after every announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
press of this button. Once the complete message
has displayed, INFO disappears from the display The radio plays the traffic announcement if the
until another new message is received. The last volume is low. The radio interrupts the play
message can be displayed by pressing the INFO of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
button. The last message can be viewed until a new announcements and the brackets are displayed.
message is received or you tune to a different This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
station. Radio Service.
268
Radio Messages When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system the track number displays.
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
factory. If CAL ERR displays it means that
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
the radio has not been configured properly for the
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer
manner.
for service.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
LOCKED: This message displays when the reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your recording, the quality of the music that has been
vehicle to your dealer for service. recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
be corrected, contact your dealer. difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
Radio Messages for XM™ Only bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
See XM Radio Messages on page 276 later in this is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
section for further detail. scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
Playing a CD and DVDs on page 298 for more information.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in If there is no apparent damage, try a known
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition good CD.
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
269
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught 4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a the slot, label side up. The player pulls the
personal computer and a description label is CD in.
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
with a marking pen.
1. Turn the ignition on.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, 2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, two seconds.
you could damage the CD player. When A beep sounds and the light, located to the
using the CD player, use only CDs in good right of the slot, begins to flash.
condition without any label, load one CD at a 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
time, and keep the CD player and the loading load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
debris.
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light begins
If an error appears on the display, see “CD flashing again. Press the LOAD button
Messages” later in this section. again. Once the light turns green, load the
next disc. Repeat this procedure for each CD.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this The CD player takes up to six CDs.
button to load CDs into the CD player. This CD
player holds up to six CDs. To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
To insert one CD, do the following: CDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
1. Turn the ignition on. If more than one CD has been loaded, a
2. Press and release the LOAD button. number for each CD displays.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
270
Playing a Specific Loaded CD Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after trying to push it in manually. The
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the player’s 25-second eject timer resets at each
display. To play a specific CD, first press the press of eject, causing the player to not eject the
CD AUX button, then press the numbered CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A small
bar displays under the CD number that is Once the player stops and the CD is ejected,
playing and the track number also displays. remove the CD. After removing the CD, push the
PWR knob off and then on again, or wait for
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in the system to reset. This clears the CD-sensing
this section. feature and enables CDs to be loaded into
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of the player again.
this button to eject a CD(s). A beep sounds and { REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
the indicator light flashes to let you know when a reverse quickly within a track. You will hear
CD is being ejected. sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
REMOVE CD displays. The CD can be removed. play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, displays.
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
If the CD is pushed back into the player, before the FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
25 second time period is complete, the player advance quickly within a track. You will hear
senses an error and tries to eject the CD several sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
times before stopping. play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track
or an entire CD can be repeated.
271
To use repeat, do the following: AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press AUTO EQ to select the desired equalization setting
and release the RPT button. RPT displays. while playing a CD. The equalization is set
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press this section.
and hold the RPT button for two seconds.
RPT displays. Press RPT again to turn sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the
off repeat play. start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
RDM (Random): With the random setting, you next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
can listen to the tracks in random, rather than than once, the player continues moving backward
sequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs. or forward through the CD.
To use random, do one of the following:
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
to in random order, press and release the SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use this
RDM button. RANDOM ONE displays. Press feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
RDM again to turn off random play. currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are again, to stop scanning.
loaded in random order, press and hold
RDM for more than two seconds. A beep To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
sounds and RANDOM ALL displays. Press SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD
RDM again to turn off random play. SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning.
272
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long 3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
the current track has been playing. To change the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
default on the display, track and elapsed time, SCAN right arrow to locate the track to be
press the knob until you see the desired display, saved. The track begins to play.
then hold the knob until the display flashes. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to
The selected display now becomes default. save the track into memory. When SONG
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a LIST is pressed, one beep sounds. After
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remains two seconds of continuously pressing
safely inside the radio for future listening. the SONG LIST button, two beeps sound to
confirm that the track has been saved.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
CD when listening to the radio. selections.
Using Song List Mode S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called 20 selections.
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track To play the song list, press the SONG LIST
selections. button. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform The recorded tracks begin to play in the order they
the following steps: were saved.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track
this section for more information. returns to the first saved track.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not display. If
S-LIST is displayed, press the SONG
LIST button to turn it off.
273
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the To delete the entire song list, perform the following
following steps: steps:
1. Turn the CD player on. 1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list
on. S-LIST displays. on. S-LIST displays.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the 3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
desired track to be deleted. more than four seconds. One beep sounds,
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for followed by two beeps after two seconds, and
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, a final beep sounds after four seconds.
one beep sounds. After two seconds of S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the song
continuously pressing the SONG LIST button, list has been deleted.
two beeps sound to confirm that the track If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
has been deleted. saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
After a track has been deleted, the remaining automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
tracks are moved up the list. When another track saved to the song list again are added to the
is added to the song list, the track is added to bottom of the list.
the end of the list. To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed
from the display.
274
CD Messages Listening to a DVD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the Your vehicle may have a Rear Seat Entertainment
display and/or the CD ejects, it could be for one of System, see Rear Seat Entertainment System
the following reasons: on page 277 for more information. If your vehicle
has this system and a DVD is playing, the
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to DVD symbol displays indicating that the DVD is
normal, the CD should play. available and can be listened through the vehicle’s
• You are driving on a very rough road. speakers.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button
should play.
until RSE displays. The current source stops and
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or the DVD sound comes through the speakers.
upside down. To stop listening to the DVD press the CD AUX
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an button, if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND
hour and try again. button to select a different source.
• There could have been a problem while When the RSE system is turned off, the radio
burning the CD. displays RSE OFF and the radio returns to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
275
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.
276
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
Navigation/Radio System Rear Seat Entertainment System

Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system. Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
The navigation system has built-in features Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology includes a DVD player, a video display screen,
alone, no matter how advanced, can never two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation control.
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
277
Parental Control The DVD system is designed to be inoperable when
the vehicle is exposed to extremely low or high
This button is located behind the video screen, temperatures, in order to protect the system from
next to the auxiliary jacks, near the driver of damage. Operate the DVD system under normal or
the vehicle. Press this button while a DVD or CD comfortable cabin temperature ranges.
is playing to freeze the video and mute the
audio. The video screen will display Parental Headphones
Control On and the power indicator light on the
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
headphones.
other button operations from the remote control
and the DVD player, with the exception of the eject The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch
button. The driver will then be able to gain the and a volume control. To use the headphones,
attention of the rear seat passengers. Press this turn the switch to ON. An indicator light on
button again to restore normal operation of the headphones will illuminate. If the light does not
the DVD player and remote control. illuminate, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
for more information. Switch the headphones
player power on and automatically resume play if
to OFF when not in use.
the vehicle is in an enabled power mode.
The transmitters are located below the overhead
Before You Drive RSE control panel. The headphones will shut
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers off automatically to save the battery power if the
only. The driver cannot safely view the video DVD system is shut off, or if the headphones
screen while driving and should not try to do so. are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or
step out of the vehicle, the headphones will lose
the audio signal.
278
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones, If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or
use the volume control. DVD play, there may be a low hissing noise
You can listen to the RSE system through the through the speakers and/or headphones. If the
wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat Audio hissing sound in the wireless headphones
(RSA) system, if equipped when the following seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
occurs: batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
hissing is normal.
• The RSA system is on
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing foam ear pads that can be replaced.
• RSE is displayed on the front audio system by Foam ear pads on these headphones may
pressing the TAPE/CD button on the RSA become worn or damaged. The headphone foam
system ear pads can become damaged if they are not
See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 293 for more handled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads do
information. become damaged or worn out, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set.
If the front seat passengers are listening to the
It is not necessary to replace the complete
RSE system through the vehicle’s speakers
headphone set.
and the rear seat passengers are using the wired
headphones to listen to the RSA system, the The headphone replacement foam ear pads can
BAND button will not access XM™ Satellite Radio be ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more
Service. information.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
279
Battery Replacement Stereo RCA Jacks
To change the batteries, do the following: The RCA jacks are located behind the video
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
door located on the left side of the headphone audio and video signals to be connected from
earpiece. an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
used for video inputs, the red RCA jack for right
compartment. Make sure that they are
audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left audio
installed correctly using the diagram on the
inputs. The system requires standard RCA
inside of the battery compartment.
cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary
3. Tighten the screw on the battery device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
compartment door. manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,
period of time, remove the batteries, and keep connect an external auxiliary device such as a
them in a cool, dry place. camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the
front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned
on, the player will automatically begin playing
the disc and the user will need to press the SRCE
button on the remote control or on the DVD
player faceplate to switch the system between the
DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section
280
Audio Output To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press
either the CD, the CD TAPE, or the CD AUX
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices button on the radio. The audio from the RSE
can be heard through the following possible system can be heard through the wireless
sources: headphones and the vehicles speakers at the
• Wireless Headphones same time.
• Vehicle’s Speakers The volume on the radio may vary when switching
• Rear Seat Audio (RSA) RCA Jacks, if between a radio station, CD, DVD, cassette, or
equipped. Plug the wired headphones, auxiliary device.
not included into the jacks on the RSA system. If there is a decreased audio signal during CD or
Only one audio source can be heard through the DVD play, there may be a low hissing noise
vehicle’s speakers at a time. through the speakers and/or headphones. If the
hissing sound in the wireless headphones
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
heard through all of the vehicles speakers batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
when the following occurs: hissing is normal.
• The RSA system, if equipped is off
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and either the
CD, the CD TAPE, or the CD AUX button
is pressed to enable the RSE system
RSE will appear on the radio display when the
RSE system is on and RSE OFF, when it is off.
281
Video Screen DVD Player
The video screen is located in the overhead The DVD player is located in the overhead
console. console.
To use the video screen, do the following: The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons
1. Push forward on the release button and the on the DVD player, and/or by the buttons on
screen will fold down. the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
2. Push the screen away from you and adjust its
position as desired. The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for the
When the video screen is not in use, push it up country that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD
into its stowed and latched position. region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player and display will continue to Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD
operate when the video screen is in either the up and Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by
or down positions. this DVD player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media
The video screen contains the transmitters for the is supported if formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R
wireless headphones and the receiver for the and DVD+RW media may or may not be supported
remote control. If the screen is in the closed by the DVD player. The DVD player does not
position, the signals will not be available for the support DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio
operation of the headphones or the remote control. media. An error message will appear on the
display if this type of media is inserted into the
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video DVD player.
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for If an error message appears on the video screen,
more information. see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
282
DVD Player Buttons s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press it again to
continue play of a DVD or CD.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the
media menu. The media menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the media
menu. After making a selection press enter. This
button only operates when using a DVD.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button to
Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, display
or CD. mode, and dynamic range compression. The
dynamic range compression feature can be used
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD to reduce loud audio and increase low audio
player on and off. produced by some DVDs.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the To change a feature back to the factory default
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary setting, press this button to display the feature,
source. then press and hold this button. The default setting
will appear on the display.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding. Press this button While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD. hold this button to display and to remove the track
and time information.
283
n, q, p, o (Directional Control Stopping and Resuming Playback
Circle): Press these buttons to move through To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
menu choices, or to move forward or back button on the DVD player faceplate or the
in a movie. These controls can be used to move remote control.
forward or backward through a CD.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
r (Enter): Press this button to select choices on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
highlighted in any menu. control. The movie should resume play from where
it was last stopped if the disc has not been
Playing a Disc ejected and the stop button has not been pressed
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, label side twice on the remote control or the DVD player
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player will faceplate.
continue loading the disc and the player will If the disc has been ejected or if the stop button
automatically start if the vehicle is in has been pressed twice on the remote control
ACCESSORY, ON, START, or RAP. or the DVD player faceplate, the disc will resume
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that play at the beginning of the disc.
the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause Ejecting a Disc
button on the player faceplate or on the remote
control. Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate
to eject the disc. There is not an eject button on
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
the remote control.
skipping of the copyright information or the
previews. Some DVDs will begin playing after the If a disc is ejected from the player, but not
previews have finished. If the DVD does not removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
begin playing at the main title, refer to the a short period of time. The disc will be stored
on-screen instructions. in the DVD player. The DVD player will not resume
play of the disc automatically.
284
Remote Control Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the
desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
may affect the ability of the transmitter to
receive signals from the remote control. If the
remote control does not seem to be working, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking
the line of sight will affect the function of the
remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place. O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote
control does not have a press and hold feature. v (Title): Press this button to go back to the title
screen, if there is one.
285
n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch the
buttons to move through DVD menus. The up system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
arrow will skip to the next chapter or track, source.
the down arrow will take you to the beginning of
the current chapter or track. Press the down arrow c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
twice to take you to the previous chapter or rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press
track. The right arrow will fast forward and the left this button twice to return to the beginning of
arrow will reverse through a chapter or track. the DVD.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
display mode, and dynamic range compression. Press this button again to return to the previous
The dynamic range compression feature can chapter or track. This button may not work
be used to reduce loud audio and increase low when the DVD is playing the copyright information
audio produced by some DVDs. or previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
e (Sound): Press this button to move to the keypad provides the capability of direct chapter,
next language or commentary. Press this button to
title, and track number selection.
call up a menu that will operate only when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
function will vary for each disc. select chapter, title, and track numbers greater
than 9. Press this button before inputting the
r (Rewind): Press this button to reverse the number.
DVD. To stop reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is \ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
playing the copyright information or the previews. after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
286
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the { (Subtitles): This button turns on subtitles and
remote control backlighting on. moves through subtitle options (English, Spanish,
French, etc., if available). Press this button to
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the call up a menu that will operate only when a DVD
media menu. The media menu is different on every is being played. The format and content of this
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow function will vary for each disc.
buttons to move the cursor around the media
menu. After making a selection, press the enter [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
button. forward the DVD. To stop fast forwarding, press
this button again. This button may not work
r (Enter): Press this button to select the when the DVD is playing the copyright information
choice that is highlighted in any menu. or the previews.
q (Return): Press this button to go back one s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
step in any menu. Press this button to exit of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a
the current menu and to move to the previous DVD is playing to pause it. Press it again to
menu. This button will operate only when a DVD continue playing the DVD or CD.
is playing and/or a menu is active.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
| (Camera): This button changes camera to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
angles on DVDs that have this feature. Press this This button may not work when the DVD is playing
button to display a menu that will operate only the copyright information or the previews.
when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
287
Setup Menu Battery Replacement
To access the setup menu, ensure that a DVD is To change the remote control batteries, do the
in the player and the video is stopped. Press following:
the main menu button. Once the menu is activated, 1. Unclip the battery door located on the back of
use the directional arrows and the enter button the remote control.
to navigate the screen.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
The setup menu allows the user to select default compartment. Make sure that they are
preferences for Menu Language, Subtitle installed correctly, using the diagram on the
Language, Audio Language, TV Aspect, TV Mode, inside of the battery compartment.
and Dynamic Range Compression.
3. Close the battery door.
Not all DVDs support all the feature defaults in the
setup menus. In the event a particular feature is If the remote control is to be stored for a long
not supported, defaults will be provided by period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
the DVD media. in a cool, dry place.
Exit the setup menu by pressing the return button
on the remote control or the DVD player. If
changes are made to the system setup defaults,
the disc will resume play from the beginning
and not where it previously left off.
288
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart Problem Recommended Action
Problem Recommended Action No sound. The volume on the
headphones could be too
No power. The ignition may not be in low. Adjust the volume on
ACCESSORY, ON, the right earpiece on the
START, or RAP. The wireless headphones. If
parental control button the DVD system is being
might have been pressed. heard through the vehicle
The power indicator light speakers, adjust the
will flash. volume from the radio.
Disc will not play. The system might be off. The radio must have the
The parental control RSE enabled by using the
button might have been CD, CD TAPE, or CD
pressed. The power AUX button.
indicator light will flash. The picture is distorted This is normal for this
The system might be in during fast forward or operation.
auxiliary source mode. reverse.
Press the SRCE button to
switch between the DVD The picture does not fill Quickly press and release
player and the auxiliary the screen. There are the display control button
source. The disc is upside black borders on the top on the remote control or
down or is not compatible. and bottom or on both the DVD player and
sides or it looks choose Display Mode.
stretched out. Then select Full. This will
fill the screen. If there are
borders on the top and
bottom, the movie may
have been made that way
for a standard screen.
289
Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
I ejected the disc and Eject the disc again. After stopping the player, I Press the stop button on
tried to take it out, but it push the play button but the remote control to
was pulled back into sometimes the DVD starts resume where the DVD
the slot. where I left off, and left off. Press the stop
The language in the audio Press the main menu sometimes at the button twice to start the
or on the screen is wrong. button on the DVD player beginning. DVD at the beginning. If
or the remote control and the power is off and the
change the audio or DVD is still in the player,
language selection on the press the play button.
DVD menu. The DVD is playing but Press and release the
The remote control does Point the remote control there is no picture or SRCE button on the
not work. directly at the transmitter sound. The auxiliary remote control or the DVD
window. The batteries source is running but player to get to auxiliary
could be weak or put in there is no picture or input. Check to make sure
wrong. The parental sound. that the auxiliary source is
control button might have connected to the inputs
been pressed. The power properly.
indicator light will flash. The audio or video skips The DVD could be dirty or
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button or jumps. scratched. Try cleaning
or off? on the remote control to the DVD.
go to the DVDs main
menu. Then follow the
screen prompts.
290
Problem Recommended Action Problem Recommended Action
When I return to the DVD If the stop button was My disc is stuck in the Press the eject button on
from the system menu, pressed once, it resumes player. The eject button the DVD player. Turn the
sometimes it plays from play from where it left off. does not work. power off, then on again,
the beginning and If the stop button was then press the eject
sometimes from where it pressed twice, it will start button on the DVD player.
left off. at the beginning of the Do not attempt to force or
DVD. However, if a remove the disc from the
change was made to the player. If the problem
menu, the DVD will start persists, return to your
from where it left off, even GM dealer for further
if the stop button was only assistance.
pressed once. I lost the remote control Contact your GM dealer
The fast forward, reverse, Some commands that do and/or the headphones. for assistance.
previous, and next one thing for DVDs will Sometimes the wireless This could be caused by
functions do not work. not always work or headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
perform the same function or buzzes for a moment, towers or by using the
for audio, CDs, or games. then it comes back. cellular telephone or other
These functions may also radio transmitter device in
be disabled when the the vehicle.
DVD is playing the
copyright information or DVD System inoperable. In severe or extreme
the previews. temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges.
291
Problem Recommended Action Region Code Error: This message will be
The wireless headphones Verify that the displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
have audio distortion. headphones are facing to compatible with the region code of the DVD player.
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are Load/Eject Error: This message will be
indicated on the displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or
headphones to ensure ejected.
that the signal is received
properly. No Disc: This message will be displayed when
In auxiliary mode, the Check the signal coming the play button is pressed without a disc in
picture moves or scrolls. from the auxiliary device the player.
and make sure that the
connection and the signal DVD Distortion
are good.
There may be an experience with video distortion
DVD Messages when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB
The following errors may be displayed on the radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way
video screen. radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
Disc Format Error: This message will be when operating one of these devices in or near the
displayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if the vehicle.
disc is not readable, or if the disc format is
not compatible. *Excludes the OnStar® System.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed Cleaning the DVD Player
if the mechanism can not play the disc. When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
Scratched or damaged discs will cause this error. buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
292
Cleaning the Video Screen If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and the system is on, the rear seat
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean passengers can listen to the DVDs through the
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care wired headphone jacks on the RSA system.
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as The RSE system cannot be controlled with the
damage may result. RSA system.
If the front seat passengers are listening to the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) RSE system through the vehicle’s speakers
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen and the rear seat passengers are using the wired
to any of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, or headphones to listen to the RSA system, the
CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can only BAND button will not access XM™ Satellite Radio
control the sources that the front seat passengers Service.
are not listening to. For example, rear seat Primary Radio Controls
passengers may listen to and control cassette
tapes or CDs through the headphones while the The following function is controlled by the main
driver listens to the radio through the front radio:
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control
of the volume for each set of headphones. PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn
RSA off.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will not be able to
control the source. You can operate the rear seat
audio when the main radio is off.
293
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Controls When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or the previous
selection. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to
the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to
go to the start of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. This function is inactive
if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the
system on or off.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between
system: playing a cassette tape, a CD, or a DVD when
w SEEK x: When listening to the radio, press listening to the radio. The inactive tape, CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
the up or the down arrow to go to the next or
listening.
the previous station and stay there. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
listening to the radio. FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). If the
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow front passengers are listening to the radio,
until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio will the RSA will not switch between the bands or
go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on change the frequency.
to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
294
Press BAND to listen to the radio when a cassette When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
tape or a CD is playing. The inactive cassette to go to the other side of the tape. This function
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
listening. to a cassette tape.
The BAND button will not access XM™ Satellite When a CD is playing, press this button to select
Radio service when the front seat passengers are the next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This
listening to the RSE system through the vehicle’s function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
speakers and the rear seat passengers are listening to a CD.
using the wired headphones to listen to the RSA
system. VOL # (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it
extends. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
P.SET PROG (Preset Program): Press this the volume. Push the knob back into its stored
button to scan through the preset radio stations position when you are not using it. The upper knob
set on the pushbuttons on the main radio. controls the upper headphones and the lower
The radio will go to a preset station stored on the knob controls the lower headphones.
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press this button PHONES: To listen to the RSA sound, plug the
again to stop scanning presets. This function wired headphones, into these RCA jacks.
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
295
Theft-Deterrent Feature Audio Steering Wheel Controls
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret
code to disable all radio functions whenever
battery power is removed and the radio is placed
in a different vehicle. This feature requires no
user input to be activated. The radio is
automatically armed when it is put into the vehicle
for the first time.
When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red
light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
If THEFTLOCK® is activated, the radio will not If your vehicle has this feature, some audio
operate if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
and a red LED indicator light will come on They include the following:
above the key symbol to indicate a locked
condition. If this occurs, the radio will need to be SOURCE: When listening to the radio, press this
returned to your GM dealer. button to play a cassette tape, CD, or a DVD
(if equipped). If a cassette tape, and CD, and/or
DVD are loaded, the system will go to the
tape play first. The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will
remain safely inside the player for future
listening.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn the
sound on.
296
Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or down Radio Reception
arrow to increase or decrease the volume.
You may experience frequency interference and
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to static during normal radio reception if items
go to the next or to the previous station and such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. accessories, and external electronic devices
The radio will only seek stations with a strong are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
signal that are in the selected band. there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
When playing a cassette tape or a CD, press the
up arrow to go to the next selection. AM
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
SCAN: Press this button to scan the stations that other. For better radio reception, most AM
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. radio stations will boost the power levels during
The radio will go to the first preset station the day, and then reduce these levels during
stored, play for a few seconds, then go on to the the night. Static can also occur when things like
next preset station. Press this button again to storms and power lines interfere with radio
stop scanning. The radio will only scan preset reception. When this happens, try reducing the
stations with a strong signal that are in the treble on your radio.
selected band.
297
FM Stereo Care of Your CDs and DVDs
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). cases or other protective cases and away from
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
XM™ Satellite Radio Service or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. starts from the center to the edge.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time. CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the hole and the outer edge.
interference.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
298
Fixed Mast Antenna XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car System
washes without being damaged. If the mast should The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it. snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is the XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench is open.
one quarter turn.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
299
✍ NOTES
300
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and City Driving ............................................... 321
Your Vehicle ............................................ 302 Freeway Driving ........................................ 322
Defensive Driving ...................................... 302 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 323
Drunken Driving ........................................ 303 Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 324
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 306 Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 325
Braking ...................................................... 306 Winter Driving ........................................... 327
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 307 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 309 Ice, or Snow .......................................... 331
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 310 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 332
Steering .................................................... 311 Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 332
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 313 Towing ........................................................ 337
Passing ..................................................... 314 Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 337
Loss of Control .......................................... 315 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 338
Driving at Night ......................................... 317 Level Control ............................................. 339
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 318 Towing a Trailer ........................................ 340
301
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle {CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
Defensive Driving
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: or expressways, it means “Always expect
Drive defensively. the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
Please start with a very important safety device in or other drivers are going to be careless
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
Are for Everyone on page 30. might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
302
Drunken Driving Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
Death and injury associated with drinking and alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number For persons under 21, it is against the law in
one contributor to the highway death toll, every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
claiming thousands of victims every year. medical, psychological, and developmental
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to reasons for these laws.
drive a vehicle: The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
• Judgment safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
• Muscular Coordination How much is “too much” if someone plans
• Vision to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
• Attentiveness Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who someone who is drinking depends upon
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more four things:
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths • The amount of alcohol consumed
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with • The drinker’s body weight
more than 300,000 people injured.
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
303
According to the American Medical Association, a It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce example, if the same person drank three double
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like lower BAC level.
whiskey, gin, or vodka. There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
304
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC There is something else about drinking and driving
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving that many people do not know. Medical research
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the anyone who has been drinking — driver or
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. of being killed or permanently disabled is
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has higher than if the person had not been drinking.
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of {CAUTION:
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the Drinking and then driving is very
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
number of cold showers will speed that up. attentiveness, and judgment can be
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if affected by even a small amount of
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden alcohol. You can have a serious — or
action, as when a child darts into the street? even fatal — collision if you drive after
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision. or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
305
Control of a Vehicle Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle See Brake System Warning Light on page 219.
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, Braking action involves perception time and
the steering, and the accelerator. All three reaction time.
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction second. But that is only an average. It might
Control System (TCS) on page 310. be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
Modifications on page 354. frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
306
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes system that will help prevent a braking skid.
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to United States Canada
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it If your vehicle has ABS, this warning light on the
when you brake. Once the power assist is used instrument panel will come on briefly when you start
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal your vehicle.
will be harder to push. When you start your engine, or when you begin to
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your drive away, ABS system will check itself. You
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise
Modifications on page 354. while this test is going on, and you may even
notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a
little. This is normal.
307
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make
the most of available tire and road conditions. This
can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving

safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
computer will separately work the brakes at each updates on wheel speed and controls braking
wheel. pressure accordingly.
308
Remember: ABS does not change the time you If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal same time. However, if you do not have ABS, your
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
room up ahead to stop, even though you carry it in whatever direction it was headed when
have ABS. the wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the
road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or
Using ABS into traffic.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. technique. This will give you maximum braking
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation while maintaining steering control. You can do this
or notice some noise, but this is normal. by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing pressure.
Braking in Emergencies
In an emergency, you will probably want to
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a squeeze the brakes hard without locking the
situation that requires hard braking. wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease
off the brake pedal. This will help you retain
steering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.
See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 307.
In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
309
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and United States Canada
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on If this message comes on and stays on or comes
when the traction control system is limiting on while you are driving, there’s a problem
wheel spin. See Traction Active Message on with your traction control system.
page 227. You may feel or hear the system See Service Traction System Warning Message
working, but this is normal. on page 226. When this warning message is
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the on, the TRAC OFF light will come on to remind
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, you that the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
the cruise control will automatically disengage. your driving accordingly.
When road conditions allow you to safely The traction control system automatically comes on
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
See Cruise Control on page 181. spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you can
turn the traction control system off if you ever need
to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 331.
310
To turn the system off, press the TRAC OFF Steering Tips
button located on the instrument panel switchbank.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you speed.
press the button, the message will go off, but the
system will not turn off until there is no longer A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
a current need to limit wheel spin. The TRAC mentioned on the news happen on curves.
OFF light will come on to remind you the system Here is why:
is off. You can turn the system back on at any Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
time by pressing the button again. The traction subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
control system warning message should go off. curves. The traction of the tires against the road
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
Modifications on page 354 for more information. no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
Steering vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
Power Steering the condition of your tires and the road surface,
If you lose power steering assist because the the angle at which the curve is banked, and
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is
can steer but it will take much more effort. the one factor you can control.
311
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
control systems — steering and braking — have speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
to do their work where the tires meet the road. the curve, and then accelerate gently into
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, the straightaway.
adding the hard braking can demand too much of Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
those places. You can lose control. vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The same thing can happen if you are steering Modifications on page 354.
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering Steering in Emergencies
and acceleration — can overwhelm those places There are times when steering can be more
where the tires meet the road and make you lose effective than braking. For example, you come
control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
page 310. a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up child darts out from between parked cars and
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you is the time for evasive action — steering around
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted the problem.
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
want to go slower. like these. First apply your brakes.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach See Braking on page 306. It is better to remove as
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while much speed as you can from a possible collision.
your front wheels are straight ahead. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
312
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and

a quick decision. If you are holding the steering
wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
straighten the wheel once you have avoided the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
object. the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
The fact that such emergency situations are always way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
possible is a good reason to practice defensive of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
313
Passing So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
and to crossroads for situations that might
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
affect your passing patterns. If you have any
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
doubt whatsoever about making a successful
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
pass, wait for a better time.
maneuver?
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
since the passing vehicle occupies the same pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
put the passing driver face to face with the seems empty of approaching traffic.
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on
collision. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
314
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
and do not get too close. Time your move so to be farther away from you than it really is.
you will be increasing speed as the time comes • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
pass, you will have a running start that more the next vehicle.
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
slow down and drop back again and wait for flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
another opportunity. to turn.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow • If you are being passed, make it easy for the
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull you can ease a little to the right.
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the Loss of Control
blind spot.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your happens when the three control systems — brakes,
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
before moving out of the right lane to pass. friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
When you are far enough ahead of the passed driver has asked.
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
move back into the right lane. Remember that steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
315
Skidding If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and ready for a second skid if it occurs.
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
The three types of skids correspond to your For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your driving to these conditions. It is important
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or to slow down on slippery surfaces because
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. more limited.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
foot off the accelerator pedal. shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
skid. See Traction Control System (TCS) on Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
page 310. If you do not have this system, or if the enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
system is off, then an acceleration skid is also make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
best handled by easing your foot off the you have any doubt.
accelerator pedal.
316
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
you do not have ABS, then in a braking skid, much road ahead.
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release • In remote areas, watch for animals.
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels
rolling again. This restores steering control. • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
Push the brake pedal down steadily when you place and rest.
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
rolling, you will have steering control. But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
Driving at Night much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to What you do in the daytime can also affect your
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night night vision. For example, if you spend the
vision problems, or by fatigue. day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
Here are some tips on night driving. adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
• Drive defensively. wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
• Do not drink and drive. glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
317
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer as well because your tire-to-road traction is not
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not
light — and are not even aware of it. have much tread left, you will get even less
traction. It is always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
318
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Driving too fast through large water puddles or
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good even going through some car washes can cause
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see problems, too. The water may affect your
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
the edge of the road, and even people walking. to slow down before you hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in Hydroplaning
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of build up under your tires that they can actually ride
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the enough and you are going fast enough. When your
inserts. vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
{CAUTION: if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
may not work as well in a quick stop and see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
may cause pulling to one side. You could or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
lose control of the vehicle. surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
lightly until your brakes work normally. when it is raining.
319
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can As little as six inches of flowing water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody happens, you and other vehicle occupants
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep could drown. Do not ignore police
puddles or standing water, drive through them warning signs, and otherwise be very
very slowly. cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

{CAUTION: • Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
Flowing or rushing water creates strong when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
forces. If you try to drive through flowing more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
water, as you might at a low water have your view restricted by road spray.
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
CAUTION: (Continued) Tires on page 406.
320
City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 322.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is

the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
321
Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, to pass.
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
they have their own special rules. use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
322
Once you are moving on the freeway, make Of course, you will find experienced and able
certain you allow a reasonable following distance. service experts in GM dealerships all across North
Expect to move slightly slower at night. America. They will be ready and willing to help
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the if you need it.
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your Here are some things you can check before a trip:
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
back up. Drive on to the next exit. full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
Reduce your speed according to your checked all levels?
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds, • Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
you may tend to think you are going slower than clean?
you actually are. • Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
Before Leaving on a Long Trip for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If • Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
you must start when you are not fresh — such outlook along your route? Should you
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear storm system?
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in. • Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
323
Highway Hypnosis What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the Then here are some tips:
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
awareness, or whatever. a comfortably cool interior.
There is something about an easy stretch of road • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the instruments frequently.
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, service, or parking area and take a nap, get
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
second, and you could crash and be injured. drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
324
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
325
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
{CAUTION: or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
will have to do all the work of slowing car or an accident.
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
poor braking or even none going down a
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
hill. You could crash. Always have your rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
engine running and your vehicle in gear and take appropriate action.
when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
326
Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 406.
327
Driving on Snow or Ice What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
Most of the time, those places where the tires But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
meet the road probably have good traction. may offer the least traction of all. You can get
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
and the road, you can have a very slippery freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
and will need to be very careful. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it
will improve your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the
TCS off if you ever need to. You should turn
the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 331.
Even if your vehicle has TCS, you will want to
slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the TCS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 310.
328
If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try not trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the overpass may remain icy when the
surface under the tires even more. surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. If are on it. Try not to brake while you are
you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
(ABS) on page 307. ABS improves your vehicle’s maneuvers.
stability when you make a hard stop on a If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
slippery road. Whether you have ABS or not, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel a serious situation. You should probably stay
your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get are near help and you can hike through the
the most traction you can. snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just • Turn on your hazard flashers.
slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
and you can still steer. that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
following distance on any slippery road. around you. If you do not have blankets
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be or extra clothing, make body insulators from
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mats — anything you can wrap around
may appear in shaded areas where the yourself or tuck under your clothing to
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of keep warm.
329
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be Open a window just a little on the side of
careful. the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This

saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
330
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. {CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you speed, they can explode, and you or
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as others could be injured. And, the
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of overheat. That could cause an engine
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises compartment fire or other damage. When
every half hour or so until help comes. you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
Mud, Ice, or Snow speedometer.
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you

will need to spin the wheels, but you do not Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
known as rocking can help you get out when you spin the wheels too fast while shifting
are stuck, but you must use caution. the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 332.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 424.
331
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right. It is very important to know how much weight your
That will clear the area around the front wheels. If vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
your vehicle has traction control, you should capacity weight and includes the weight of all
turn the traction control system off. See Traction occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
Control System (TCS) on page 310. Then options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you
shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning {CAUTION:
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
after a few tries, it may need to be towed out. If
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
your vehicle does need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 337. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
332
Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 406 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 413.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
Example Label weight of occupants and cargo should never
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) vehicle’s placard.
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
will find the label attached below the door lock post and passengers that will be riding in your
(striker). The tire and loading information label vehicle.
shows the number of occupant seating
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
333
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Example 1
Step 4. Item Description Total
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load Vehicle Capacity
A 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
from your trailer will be transferred to your Weight for Example 1 =
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Subtract
this reduces the available cargo and luggage B Occupant Weight 300 lbs (136 kg)
load capacity for your vehicle. 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
C Available Occupant 700 lbs (317 kg)
See Towing a Trailer on page 340 for important and Cargo Weight =
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
334
Example 2 Example 3
Item Description Total Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A Vehicle Capacity 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Weight for Example 2 = Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract Subtract
B Occupant Weight 750 lbs (340 kg) B Occupant Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information

label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
335
Certification/Tire Label your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is can change the way your vehicle handles.
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight the life of your vehicle.
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
maximum weights for the front and rear axles, warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To
find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
336
If you put things inside your vehicle — like Towing
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they Towing Your Vehicle
will keep going.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
{CAUTION: page 498.
Things you put inside your vehicle can If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
or turn, or in a crash. Towing” following.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
337
Recreational Vehicle Towing Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your • What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
motorhome. The two most common types of
manufacturer’s recommendations.
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing restrictions on how far and how long they
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and can tow.
two wheels up on a device know as a “dolly”). • Do you have the proper towing equipment?
With the proper preparation and equipment, many See your dealer or trailering professional
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See for additional advice and equipment
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 323.
338
Dinghy Towing Level Control
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with On vehicles equipped with automatic level control,
all of its wheels on the ground. It can be towed the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept
with two of its wheels on the ground. See “Dolly level as you load or unload your vehicle. However,
Towing” following. you should still not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 332.
Dolly Towing
You may hear the compressor operating when you
To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following: load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. the system self-adjusts. This is normal. The
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P). compressor should operate for brief periods of
time. If the sound continues for an extended period
3. Set the parking brake and then remove of time, your vehicle needs service.
the key.
Using heavier suspension components to get
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead added durability might not change your weight
position with a clamping device designed for ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
towing. your vehicle the right way.
5. Release the parking brake.
339
Towing a Trailer Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify the
trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
{CAUTION: than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
If you do not use the correct equipment durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe
and drive properly, you can lose control trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the used properly.
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not That is the reason for this section. In it are many
work well — or even at all. You and your time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
passengers could be seriously injured. rules. Many of these are important for your safety
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all and that of your passengers. So please read
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
for advice and information about towing a Load-pulling components such as the engine,
trailer with your vehicle. transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can at relatively higher speeds and under greater
damage your vehicle and result in costly loads, generating extra heat. The trailer also adds
repairs that would not be covered by your considerably to wind resistance, increasing the
warranty. Always follow the instructions in this pulling requirements.
section and check with your dealer for more
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
340
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
If you do, here are some important points:
• Weight of the trailer
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. • Weight of the trailer tongue
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where • Weight on your vehicle’s tires
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be state Weight of the Trailer
or provincial police. How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs
later in this section. (630 kg) with up to five occupants in the vehicle or
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg) with up to two
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. occupants. If you have the optional trailer towing
Your engine, axle or other parts could be package, your vehicle can tow up to 2,900 lbs
damaged. (1 300 kg) with up to five occupants or up to
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants. But
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph even that can be too heavy.
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
lower gear when towing a trailer. Operating on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
will minimize heat buildup and extend the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
life of your transaxle. Tongue” later in this section for more information.
341
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming Weight of the Trailer Tongue
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
of additional optional equipment, passengers and weight to measure because it affects the total
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
from the maximum trailer weight. Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
You can ask your dealer for our trailering the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
information or advice, or you can write us at: have a lot of options, equipment, passengers,
Buick Customer Assistance Center or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
P.O. Box 33136 weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
Detroit, MI 48232-5136 reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
In Canada, write to: if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
General Motors of Canada Limited carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 Vehicle on page 332 for more information about
1908 Colonel Sam Drive your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
342
Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s
ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight
cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR
(Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering
capacity more than the total of the additional
weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
If you are using a weight-carrying or weight (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It
should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR
total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
maximum allowable tongue weight for your Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
vehicle. (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
343
You can expect tongue weight to be at least Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and may think that you should subtract 700 additional
because the weight is applied well behind the pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go
as much. The weight at the rear axle could further and think you must limit tongue weight to
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the the rear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg). RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
with some of the latest options and you have a (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that
front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs: is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
344
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires If you do, remember to seal the holes when you
remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine
numbers on the Certification/Tire Label at the rear Exhaust on page 140. Dirt and water can, too.
edge of the driver’s door, or see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 332. Do not go over the Safety Chains
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of
You should always attach chains between your
the trailer tongue.
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
Hitches chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
roads are a few reasons why you will need manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
will weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), use a the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
sway control of the proper size. This chains to drag on the ground.
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling while driving.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
345
Trailer Brakes Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the {CAUTION:
instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be
able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. If you have a rear-most window open and
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake monoxide (CO) could come into your
system. If you do, both brake systems will not vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It
work well, or at all. can cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 140. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
346
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
CAUTION: (Continued) attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
through a window in the rear or moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
another opening, drive with your front, by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
main heating or cooling system on This lets you check your electrical connection at
and with the fan on any speed. This the same time.
will bring fresh, outside air into your During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
vehicle. Do not use the climate control that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
setting for maximum air because it trailer brakes are still working.
only recirculates the air inside your
vehicle. See Climate Control System Following Distance
on page 200. Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
experience. Before setting out for the open road, that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint Passing
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always You will need more passing distance up ahead
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is when you are towing a trailer. And, because
now a good deal longer and not nearly as you are a good deal longer, you will need to go
responsive as your vehicle is by itself. much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
347
Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, extra wiring.
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
guide you. flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
Making Turns change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
think drivers behind you are seeing your signal
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
when they are not. It is important to check
while trailering.
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider working.
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will
not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
348
Driving On Grades Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your {CAUTION:
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well. You really should not park your vehicle,
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in AUTOMATIC something goes wrong, your rig could
OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear. start to move. People can be injured, and
This will minimize heat build-up and extend the both your vehicle and the trailer can be
life of your transaxle. damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do

the following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
349
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
down while you: Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
• Start your engine. automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling
• Shift into a gear. system and brake system. Each of these is
• Release the parking brake. covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
2. Let up on the brake pedal. good idea to review these sections before you
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the start your trip.
chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the bolts are tight.
chocks.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness
located at the rear of your vehicle. To use
the trailer wiring harness, you need a converter
kit. Contact your dealer for more information.
350
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 354 Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 372
Accessories and Modifications ................... 354 Engine Coolant .......................................... 375
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 355 Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 378
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 355 Engine Overheating ................................... 378
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Overheated Engine Protection
Vehicle ................................................... 356 Operating Mode ..................................... 380
Fuel ............................................................. 356 Cooling System ......................................... 381
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 356 Power Steering Fluid ................................. 387
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 356 Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 388
California Fuel ........................................... 357 Brakes ...................................................... 389
Additives ................................................... 357 Battery ...................................................... 393
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 358 Jump Starting ............................................ 394
Filling the Tank ......................................... 359 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 399
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 361 Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 399
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 362 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Hood Release ........................................... 363 Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 399
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 364 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 401
Engine Oil ................................................. 365 Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps .................. 402
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 368 Replacement Bulbs ................................... 404
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 370 Windshield Replacement ............................ 404
351
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 404 Appearance Care ........................................ 451
Tires ............................................................ 406 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 451
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 407 Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 453
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 410 Leather ...................................................... 454
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 413 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Check Tire Pressure System ..................... 414 Other Plastic Surfaces ........................... 454
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 416 Care of Safety Belts .................................. 455
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 418 Weatherstrips ............................................ 455
Buying New Tires ...................................... 418 Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 455
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 420 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 456
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 420 Finish Care ............................................... 456
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 422 Windshield, Backglass, and
Wheel Replacement .................................. 422 Wiper Blades ......................................... 457
Tire Chains ............................................... 424 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 457
Accessory Inflator ...................................... 425 Tires ......................................................... 458
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 427 Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 458
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 428 Finish Damage .......................................... 459
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 429 Underbody Maintenance ............................ 459
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 459
the Spare Tire ....................................... 436 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 460
Secondary Latch System ........................... 441
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 444
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 450
352
Vehicle Identification .................................. 461 Power Windows and Other Power
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 461 Options .................................................. 462
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 461 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 463
Electrical System ........................................ 462 Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 463
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 462 Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 466
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 462 Capacities and Specifications .................... 469
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 462
353
Service Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
to your dealer for all your service needs. You safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
and supported service people. aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
control. Some of these accessories may even
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
354
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
California to cause cancer and birth defects and other fasteners. English and
or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many metric fasteners can be easily
parts and systems (including some inside the confused. If you use the wrong
vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear fasteners, parts can later break
by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. or fall off. You could be hurt.
Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual. It
tells you much more about how to service your
{CAUTION: vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
You can be injured and your vehicle could Information on page 510.
be damaged if you try to do service work Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
on a vehicle without knowing enough attempting to do your own service work, see
about it. Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, page 102.
experience, the proper replacement
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
parts, and tools before you attempt any
and list the mileage and the date of any service
vehicle maintenance task.
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
CAUTION: (Continued) on page 488.
355
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
Things you might add to the outside of your octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may less than 87, you may notice an audible knocking
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer noise when you drive, commonly referred to as
performance. Check with your dealer before spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part Gasoline Specifications
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum
specification D 4814 in the United States or
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
Gasoline. contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 357 for additional information.
356
California Fuel Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on States are now required to contain additives that
fuels that meet California specifications. See the will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits
underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not from forming, allowing your emission control system
available in states adopting California emissions to work properly. In most cases, you should not
standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on have to add anything to your fuel. However, some
fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission gasolines contain only the minimum amount of
control system performance may be affected. The additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
Indicator Lamp on page 222. If this occurs, return to experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
determined that the condition is caused by the type TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your has additives that will help correct and prevent
warranty. most deposit-related problems.
357
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
may be available in your area. General Motors additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
recommends that you use these gasolines if they tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
comply with the specifications described earlier. gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels Motors recommends against the use of such
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the
used in vehicles that were not designed for life of spark plugs and the performance of the
those fuels. emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use service.
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage Fuels in Foreign Countries
would not be covered under your warranty. If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
358
Filling the Tank The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
{CAUTION: counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire the right.
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid While refueling, hang
injuries to you and others, read and follow the tethered fuel cap
all the instructions on the pump island. from the hook on
Turn off your engine when you are the fuel door.
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
359
Your vehicle may also have a light that will come
on in the message center to let you know your
{CAUTION: gas cap is open. See Check Gas Cap Message
on page 231 for more information.
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel {CAUTION:
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
unscrew the cap all the way. notifying the station attendant. Leave
the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
finished pumping before removing the nozzle. get the right type. Your dealer can get one
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 455. fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it indicator lamp to light and may damage
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The your fuel tank and emissions system. See
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 222.
been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 222.
360
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION: • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with

the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
be maintained until the filling is
is in your vehicle. Static electricity complete.
discharge from the container can ignite the • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
361
Checking Things Under
the Hood {CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
{CAUTION: parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
An electric fan under the hood can start up windshield washer and other fluids, and
and injure you even when the engine is not plastic or rubber. You or others could be
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
away from any underhood electric fan. things that will burn onto a hot engine.
362
Hood Release 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the
center of the hood, and push the secondary
To open the hood, do the following: hood release to the right.
1. Pull the hood release 3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas
handle with this struts will automatically take over to lift and
symbol on it. It is hold the hood in the fully open position.
located under the
instrument panel on Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are
the driver’s side of on properly. Then, pull the hood down to close.
the vehicle.
363
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, this is what you see:
364
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Engine Oil
Block on page 466.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Checking Engine Oil
Starting on page 394. It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
Washer Fluid on page 388. on level ground.
D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
Cap on page 378. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 364
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Steering Fluid on page 387. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 365. do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” show the actual level.
under Engine Oil on page 365. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
Transaxle Fluid on page 372. and check the level.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 389.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 370.
K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling
System on page 381.
365
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
See Engine
Compartment
Overview on page 364
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip

of the dipstick, you will need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 469. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in
the cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
366
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil

container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
Look for two things: starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
• GM6094M Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
Standard GM6094M. You should look for the American Petroleum Institute Certified For
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to
GM6094M. use the recommended oil can result in engine
• SAE 5W-30 damage not covered by your warranty.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
best for your vehicle.
your vehicle.
367
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the When the system has calculated that oil life has
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide come on. See Change Engine Oil Message on
easier cold starting and better protection for the page 230. Change your oil as soon as possible
engine at extremely low temperatures. within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
Engine Oil Additives oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
oils with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard and filter must be changed at least once a year and
GM6094M are all you will need for good at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
performance and engine protection. has GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and
Engine Oil Life System keep it at the proper level.
When to Change Engine Oil If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
know when to change the engine oil and filter. system whenever the oil is changed.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will
be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, you must reset the system
every time the oil is changed.
368
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life 3. Press and hold the SET button until 100% is
System displayed.
You will hear three chimes and the CHANGE
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to ENGINE OIL message will go off.
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
4. Turn the key to OFF.
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system
so it can calculate when the next oil change is If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes
required. If a situation occurs where you change back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
being turned on, reset the system. What to Do with Used Oil
If your vehicle does not have the optional Driver Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
Information Center (DIC), do the following: be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off. cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
slowly three times within five seconds. water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
3. Turn the key to OFF. dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine and disposal of oil products.
oil life system has not reset. Repeat the Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
procedure. change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
If your vehicle has the optional DIC, do the the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
following: putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
2. Press the MODE button until the DIC oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
reads OIL LIFE LEFT/HOLD SET TO RESET. used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local
recycling center for help.
369
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 475 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
3.5L V6 Engine shown release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Do not use
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 364
compressed air to clean the filter.
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
370
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.
2. Remove the duct. Operating the engine with the air cleaner/
3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air filter off can cause you or others to be
cleaner/filter housing. burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. air; it helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. If it is not there and the engine
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the
backfires, you could be burned. Do not
panel with the slots at the bottom of the
housing. drive with it off, and be careful working on
the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place.
If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs
are seated correctly in the slots. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps. can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
371
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
When to Check and Change Automatic the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
Transaxle Fluid or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.
A good time to check your vehicles automatic Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil the transaxle fluid.
is changed. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
in Additional Required Services on page 478, • When outside temperatures are above
and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in 90°F (32°C).
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 485.
• At high speed for quite a while.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle • In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F
may choose to have this done at the dealership to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
service department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
instructions here, or you could get a false reading above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
on the dipstick. you may have to drive longer.
372
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the engine, do the
following:
To prepare your vehicle, do the following:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place and keep See Engine Compartment Overview on page 364
the engine running. for information on dipstick location.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift The dipstick handle will be a red loop, located at
lever in PARK (P). the rear of the engine compartment, on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
for about three seconds in each range. rag or paper towel.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to and then pull it back out again.
five minutes. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in
the cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
373
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine the damages may not be covered by your
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 485. fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the Lubricants on page 485.
proper fluid to bring the level into the 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. described under “How to Check Automatic
1. Pull out the dipstick. Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. the dipstick back in all the way.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
374
Engine Coolant A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with • Give freezing protection down to −34°F
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
(−37°C).
designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended • Protect against rust and corrosion.
life coolant.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The following explains your cooling system and
• Let the warning messages and gages work as
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
they should.
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 378. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
375
What Coolant to Use Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not covered by your warranty. Too much water
damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
mixture, you do not need to add anything else. radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
{CAUTION: year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
Adding only plain water to your cooling additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
some other liquid such as alcohol, can proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
boil before the proper coolant mixture will. this manual for the cooling system. See
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
376
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The coolant recovery
tank is located on the Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
driver’s side of the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
vehicle, above and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
the engine air you badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
cleaner/filter. See you will almost never have to add coolant at
Engine Compartment
the radiator. Never turn the radiator
Overview on page 364
for more information pressure cap — even a little — when
on location. the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When {CAUTION:

your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at the full cold mark, or a little higher. When your You can be burned if you spill coolant
engine is warm, the level should be above the on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
full cold mark or a little higher. ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
Adding Coolant engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine.
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 381.
377
Radiator Pressure Cap If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed {CAUTION:
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine
damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the Steam from an overheated engine can
radiator filler neck. burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 364
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
for more information on location.
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
Engine Overheating there is no sign of steam or coolant
You will find a coolant temperature warning and a before you open the hood.
coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s If you keep driving when the vehicles
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
Warning Message on page 227 and Engine Coolant
catch fire. You or others could be badly
Temperature Gage on page 221.
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 380 for
information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
378
Notice: If your engine catches fire because If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle steam, try this for a minute or so:
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs 1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.
would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 2. Turn on the heater to full hot at the highest fan
on page 380 for information on driving to a speed and open the windows as necessary.
safe place in an emergency. 3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
If No Steam Is Coming From Your driving — DRIVE (D).
Engine
If the vehicle no longer has the overheat warning,
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. about 10 minutes. If the warning does not
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot come back on, you can drive normally.
when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
379
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park Overheated Engine Protection
your vehicle right away.
Operating Mode
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If vehicle still This emergency operating mode lets your vehicle
has the warning, turn off the engine and get be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. If an overheated engine condition exists, an
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection overheat protection mode which alternates firing
Operating Mode” later in this section. groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, there is a significant loss in power
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
and engine performance. The temperature gage
service help right away.
indicates an overheat condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
system. See Engine Oil on page 365.
380
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is {CAUTION:
what you see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is

boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
381
The coolant level should be at or above the full If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
cooling system. needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
{CAUTION: warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 380 for information on
Heater and radiator hoses, and other driving to a safe place in an emergency.
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant could require changing sooner, at
coolant. That could cause an engine fire, 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
and you could be burned. Get any leak whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
fixed before you drive the vehicle. be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
382
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, but the could catch fire and you or others could
coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark, be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
and DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 375
for more information. Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended coolant and the
{CAUTION: proper coolant mixture.
Adding only plain water to your cooling

system can be dangerous. Plain water, or {CAUTION:
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will. You can be burned if you spill coolant
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
set for the proper coolant mixture. With ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine
plain water or the wrong mixture, your parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant
engine could get too hot but you would on a hot engine.
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
CAUTION: (Continued) When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at or above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.
383
If the overheat warning continues, there is one How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
the cooling system is cool before you do it. procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the

cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
until it first stops. Do not press down while
turning the pressure cap.
384
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but
now push down as you turn it. Remove
the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
Housing Bypass Tube
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine
parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant 3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air
on a hot engine. bleed valves.
There are two bleed valves. One is located on
the thermostat housing. The other is located
on the thermostat bypass tube.
385
Filling in the Radiator Filler Neck Upper Radiator Hose
®
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 375 Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
for more information about the proper coolant 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the
mixture. radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
close the valves after the radiator is filled. level reaches the base of the filler neck.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the
engine and the compartment.
386
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time Power Steering Fluid
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure See Engine
cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap Compartment
line up properly. Overview on page 364
for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the
system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss
Filling in the Coolant Recovery Tank in this system could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the full
cold mark.
10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.
387
How to Check Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following: What Washer Fluid to Use
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down. When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a where the temperature may fall below freezing,
clean rag. use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the Adding Washer Fluid
fluid level on the dipstick.
Open the cap with the
When the engine compartment is hot, the level washer symbol on it.
should be at the H (Hot) mark. When it is cold, the Add washer fluid until
level should be at the C (Cold) mark. If the fluid the tank is full. See
is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid. Engine Compartment
What Power Steering Fluid to Use Overview on page 364
for reservoir location.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 485.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
388
Notice: Brakes
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions Brake Fluid
for adding water.
Your brake master
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer cylinder reservoir
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze is filled with DOT-3
and damage your washer fluid tank and brake fluid. See Engine
other parts of the washer system. Also, Compartment Overview
water does not clean as well as washer on page 364 for the
fluid. location of the reservoir.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank
if it is completely full. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that
your windshield washer. It can damage your the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level
washer system and paint. during normal brake lining wear. When new linings
are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other
reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes will not work well, or will not work at all.
389
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. What to Add
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You
container only. See Recommended Fluids
should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
and Lubricants on page 485.
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it {CAUTION:
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
could be burned, and your vehicle could system, the brakes may not work well, or
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when they may not even work at all. This could
work is done on the brake hydraulic cause a crash. Always use the proper
system. brake fluid.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your

brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 219.
390
Notice: Brake Wear
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
as engine oil, in the brake system can make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
damage brake system parts so badly that pads are worn and new pads are needed. The
they will have to be replaced. Do not sound may come and go or be heard all the time
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake {CAUTION:
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 455. The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out

brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
391
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help Replacing Brake System Parts
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque many parts have to be of top quality and work
specifications. well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
Brake linings should always be replaced as with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace
complete axle sets. parts of your braking system — for example,
Brake Pedal Travel when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase your brakes may no longer work properly. For
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
trouble. wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
Brake Adjustment front and rear brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance you have come to expect
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without can change in many other ways if someone puts in
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. the wrong replacement brake parts.
392
Battery Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the replacement number shown on the original the battery. This will help keep your battery from
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco® running down.
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 364 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related {CAUTION:
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California Batteries have acid that can burn you and
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash gas that can explode. You can be badly
hands after handling. hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 394 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent

Feature on page 296.
393
Jump Starting Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may your vehicle.
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
the following steps to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground, both
{CAUTION: vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
Batteries can hurt you. They can be jump start your vehicle.
dangerous because: 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
• They contain acid that can burn you. cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
• They contain gas that can explode or not touching each other. If they are, it could
ignite. cause a ground connection you do not want.
• They contain enough electricity to You would not be able to start your vehicle, and
burn you. the bad grounding could damage the electrical
systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump starting procedure. Put an
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
costly damage to your vehicle that would transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the
not be covered by your warranty. parking brake.
394
Notice: If you leave your radio or other Squeeze the tabs and
accessories on during the jump starting swing the cap out of the
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs way to access the
would not be covered by your warranty. Always remote positive (+)
turn off your radio and other accessories when terminal.
jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet(s). Turn off the radios and all lamps that
are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help 3.5L V6 Engine
save both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate You should always use the remote positive (+)
the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal
locations on that vehicle. on the battery.
You will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote {CAUTION:
positive (+) jump starting terminal for that
purpose. The terminal is located under a
tethered cap at the front of the underhood fuse An electric fan can start up even when the
block. See Engine Compartment Overview on engine is not running and can injure you.
page 364 for more information on location. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
395
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause Fans or other moving engine parts can
battery gas to explode. People have been injure you badly. Keep your hands away
hurt doing this, and some have been from moving parts once the engine is
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need running.
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
do not need to add water to the battery loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
installed in your new vehicle. But if a could get a shock. The vehicles could
battery has filler caps, be sure the right be damaged too.
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add Before you connect the cables, here are some
water to take care of that first. If you do basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
not, explosive gas could be present. go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
Battery fluid contains acid that can terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to
a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
has one.
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
396
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
engine control module (ECM), ECM mounting the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
bracket or any cables that attach to the Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM. vehicle has one.
Attach the negative cable to a heavy, unpainted Do not let the other end touch anything until
metal engine part, other than the ECM, ECM the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
bracket or cables attached to the ECM bracket. cable does not go to the dead battery. It
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
you will get a short that would damage the or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
battery and maybe other parts too. And do not vehicle with the dead battery.
connect the negative (−) cable to the 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
because this can cause sparks. battery, but not near engine parts that move.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the The electrical connection is just as good there,
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. and the chance of sparks getting back to the
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if battery is much less.
the vehicle has one. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect and run the engine for a while.
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
the vehicle has one. probably needs service.
397
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting vehicles, do the following:
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
would not be covered by your warranty. Always the vehicle that had the dead battery.
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
not touch each other or other metal. the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover
to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
398
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Replacement Bulbs on page 404. 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this page 363 for more information.
section, contact your dealer. 2. Push in on the
headlamp panel and
Halogen Bulbs lift up the headlamp
retaining clip
partway, but do
{CAUTION: not remove.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
3. Remove the wing stud on the upper, outboard
side of the lamp assembly.
4. Unsnap the headlamp assembly by pulling it
forward, away from the vehicle.
399
5. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pulling back on the locking tab, located on
the electrical connector, to separate the
two connectors.
6. Turn the bulb socket
one-quarter of a turn
clockwise.
8. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up

the gray tabs and separate the connector
7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp from the bulb base.
housing. 9. Install the appropriate new bulb into the
electrical connector. Push the bulb firmly
enough so that the gray tabs hook over the
tab on the bulb.
10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp
housing and turn the bulb socket one-quarter
of a turn counterclockwise.
400
11. Align the retaining clips on the back of the Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
headlamp with the rectangular holes in the
mounting panel. Stoplamps
12. Push firmly on both ends of the headlamp to 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 118
snap it into position. for more information.
13. Push the retaining clip down to its original 2. Remove the
position. two screws on
the inboard
14. Reinstall the wing stud. taillamp panel.
3. Pull the lamp directly rearward from the

vehicle.
401
4. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turn Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps
counterclockwise.
This procedure is for the liftgate-mounted taillamps
5. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp
and back-up lamps. To replace one of these bulbs,
housing.
do the following:
6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 118
the tabs and separate the connector from the
bulb base.
2. Remove the panel inside the liftgate by lifting
7. Install the new bulb into the electrical
the tabs and pulling the panel off.
connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so
that the tabs hook over the tab on the bulb. 3. Remove the seven
wing nuts and the
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall. four outboard nuts
9. Reinstall the lamp to its pocket by lining up (two at each end).
the mounting pin and pushing forward to set
the position.
10. Reinstall the screws removed in Step 2.
11. Close the liftgate.
4. Gently lower the liftgate.

5. Pull the lamp assembly directly rearward from
the vehicle.
402
7. Pull the bulb assembly out from the lamp
housing.
8. Pull the bulb out of the base.
9. Install the new bulb into the electrical
connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so
that the tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.
10. Put the bulb assembly back into the lamp
housing and turn the bulb socket clockwise
one-quarter of a turn.
11. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the liftgate.
12. Gently lift the liftgate.
13. Reinstall the seven wing nuts and the four
A. Outboard Taillamp outboard nuts.
B. Center Taillamp 14. Reinstall the panel inside the liftgate by
C. Inboard Back-Up Lamp connecting the tabs.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise 15. Close the liftgate.
one-quarter of a turn.
403
Replacement Bulbs Windshield Replacement
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the
Head-Up Display (HUD) system. If you ever have
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp 3457K to get your windshield replaced, be sure to get
Headlamps one that is designed for HUD or your HUD image
may look blurred or out of focus.
High-beam 9005
Low-beam 9006 Windshield Wiper Blade
Liftgate-Mounted Replacement
Back-up Lamp 921
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
Taillamp 161 wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 475 for more information.
Rear Outboard
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn 3057K Replacement blades come in different types and
Signal Lamp are removed in different ways. For proper type and
Sidemarker Lamp 168 length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 486.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
404
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly 2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the
do the following: hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release lever
click into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps
listed above.
405
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever • Underinflated tires pose the same
have questions about your tire warranty and where danger as overloaded tires. The
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for resulting accident could cause serious
details. For additional information refer to the tire injury. Check all tires frequently to
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle. maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{CAUTION: Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 413.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
Poorly maintained and improperly used cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
tires are dangerous. impact — such as when you hit a
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can pothole. Keep tires at the
cause overheating as a result of too recommended pressure.
much friction. You could have an • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
air-out and a serious accident. See If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
Loading Your Vehicle on page 332. your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
406
Tire Sidewall Labeling (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
Useful information about a tire is molded into its tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
sidewall. The examples below show a typical and service description. See the “Tire Size”
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire illustration later in this section for more detail.
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
407
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 420.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact

spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 450 and If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 427.
408
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
number of plies in the sidewall and under the Specification): Original equipment tires designed
tread. to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
and numbers following the DOT (Department of safety guidelines.
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer Tire Size
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of The following illustration shows an example of a
the tire, although only one side may have the date typical passenger vehicle tire size.
of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
page 413. as the first character in the tire size means a
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
409
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates Tire Terminology and Definitions
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall. Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean Accessory Weight: This means the combined
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
is wide. optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the to its width.
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in located between the plies and the tread. Cords
inches. may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
tire. The load index represents the load carry by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. to the centerline of the tread.
410
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat when mounted on a vehicle.
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
page 413.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicle with standard and optional equipment vehicles.
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall capacity of a tire.
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an The maximum air pressure is molded onto
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the the sidewall.
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
of production. at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 332. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the weight, and production options weight.
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 332.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 332. by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 332.
411
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
positions. a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an can operate.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that Traction: The friction between the tire and the
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The road surface. The amount of grip provided.
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/ Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
or model name molding that is higher or deeper contact with the road.
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
the tire.
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 418.
multipurpose vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle Standards): A tire information system that
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
Pressure on page 413 and Loading Your Vehicle on determined by tire manufacturers using government
page 332. testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at Grading on page 420.
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
the tire beads are seated. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread Your Vehicle on page 332.
and the bead.
412
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, you can get the following:
occupant weight, and cargo weight. • Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to • Poor handling
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and • Rough ride
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading • Needless damage from road hazards
Information Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
page 332. the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
Inflation - Tire Pressure correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
operate effectively. amount of air pressure needed to support your
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. For additional information regarding how much
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
(under-inflation), you can get the following: the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
• Too much flexing Your Vehicle on page 332. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
• Too much heat Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
• Tire overloading was designed to carry.
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
413
When to Check If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
Spare Tire on page 450. and moisture.
How to Check Check Tire Pressure System

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire Your vehicle may have a check tire pressure
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly system that can alert you to a large change in the
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires pressure of one tire. The system won’t alert you
may look properly inflated even when they are before you drive that a tire is low or flat. You must
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure begin driving before the system will work properly.
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no The LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). RESET message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and the LOW TIRE
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. PRESSURE message will come on the message
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to center if pressure difference, or low pressure, is
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire detected in one tire. In the following conditions, the
inflation pressure matches the recommended LOW TIRE PRESSURE message may not come on
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information even if the tire pressure is low, or it may come on
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the when the tire pressure is actually normal:
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount. • More than one tire is low
• Only one tire is replaced with a new tire during
service
414
• The vehicle is moving faster than When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO
70 mph (113 km/h) RESET message appears on the Driver Information
• The system is not yet calibrated Center and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message
comes on the message center, you should stop
• The tire treadwear is uneven as soon as you can and check all your tires for
• The compact spare tire is installed damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 427. Also check the tire pressure in all four
• Tire chains are being used
tires as soon as you can. See Inflation - Tire
• The vehicle is being driven on a rough or Pressure on page 413.
frozen road
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one
If the anti-lock brake system warning light comes or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need
on, the check tire pressure system may not be to reset, or calibrate, the check tire pressure
working properly. See your dealer for service. Also, system. You’ll also need to reset the system
see Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on whenever you rotate the tires, buy new tires
page 220. and install or remove the compact spare.
The check tire pressure system detects differences Do not reset the check tire pressure system without
in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes first correcting the cause of the problem and
in tire pressure. The system can alert you about a checking and adjusting the pressure in all four tires.
low tire – but it does not replace normal tire If you reset the system when the tire pressures are
maintenance. See Tires on page 406. incorrect, the check tire pressure system will not
work properly and may not alert you when a tire is
low or high.
415
To reset the system, do the following: individual driving habits. The learning process
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON. does not need to be completed during a single trip.
Once learned, the system will remember the tire
2. Press the MODE button until the DIC reads pressure until the system is reset.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE HOLD SET TO
RESET.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
3. Press and hold the SET button until you hear
a chime, and TIRE PRESSURE RESET is Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
displayed. (8 000 to 13 000 km).
You will hear three chimes, then the LOW TIRE Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
PRESSURE message will go off and the DIC as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
will return to TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL. If the Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes back on, It Is Time for New Tires on page 418 and Wheel
the check tire pressure system has not reset. Replacement on page 422 for more information.
Repeat the procedure. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
The system completes the calibration process pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire, If it
during driving. The system learns the pressure at moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
each tire throughout the operating speed range See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
of your vehicle. The system normally takes page 444.
between 30 and 60 minutes of driving to learn The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
the tire pressures. The system normally takes more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
10 to 20 minutes of driving in each speed range first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
to learn tire pressures. The speed ranges are Maintenance on page 475.
20 to 40 mph (32 to 64 km/h), 40 to 60 mph
(64 to 96 km/h), and above 60 mph (96 km/h).
This time may be longer depending on your
416
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 469.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
When rotating your tires, always use the correct come off and cause an accident. When
rotation pattern shown here. you change a wheel, remove any rust or
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire dirt from places where the wheel attaches
rotation. to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
Tire and Loading Information label.
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 428.
Reset the check tire pressure system, if equipped.
See Check Tire Pressure System on page 414.
417
When It Is Time for New Tires Buying New Tires
One way to tell when it is GM has developed and matched specific tires for
time for new tires is to your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
check the treadwear on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
indicators, which will meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
appear when your tires Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
have only 1/16 inch replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
(1.6 mm) or less of you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
tread remaining. way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
You need a new tire if any of the following overall performance of your vehicle, including
statements are true: brake system performance, ride and handling,
• You can see the indicators at three or more traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
places around the tire.
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
418
If the tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling {CAUTION:
on page 407 for additional information.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
{CAUTION: cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
Mixing tires could cause you to lose a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
control while driving. If you mix tires of wheels on your vehicle.
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
handle properly, and you could have a that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
crash. Using tires of different sizes, they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
brands, or types may also cause damage to and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct as your vehicle’s original tires.
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels. Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
It is all right to drive with your compact the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
spare temporarily, as it was developed for attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare See Loading Your Vehicle on page 332, for more
Tire on page 450. information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
419
Different Size Tires and Wheels See Buying New Tires on page 418 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 354
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size for additional information.
than your original equipment wheels and tires, this
may affect the way your vehicle performs, including Uniform Tire Quality Grading
its braking, ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, Quality grades can be found where applicable
if your vehicle has electronic systems such as, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronic and maximum section width. For example:
stability control, the performance of these systems
can be affected. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
{CAUTION: Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
If you add different sized wheels, your temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicle may not provide an acceptable vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
level of performance and safety if tires molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
not recommended for those wheels are
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
selected. You may increase the chance snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
that you will crash and suffer serious tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
tire systems developed for your vehicle, limited-production tires.
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
420
While the tires available on General Motors Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
respect to these grades, they must also conform tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
to federal safety requirements and additional hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards. Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
Treadwear and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under when tested under controlled conditions on a
controlled conditions on a specified government specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would high temperature can cause the material of the tire
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
government course as a tire graded 100. The temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the grade C corresponds to a level of performance
actual conditions of their use, however, and may which all passenger car tires must meet under the
depart significantly from the norm due to variations Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
in driving habits, service practices, and differences Grades B and A represent higher levels of
in road characteristics and climate. performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, established for a tire that is properly inflated
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under underinflation, or excessive loading, either
controlled conditions on specified government test separately or in combination, can cause heat
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C buildup and possible tire failure.
may have poor traction performance.
421
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
the longest tire life and best overall performance. loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any
pulling to one side or the other, the alignment may of these conditions exist.
need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tires
and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your Each new wheel should have the same
dealer for proper diagnosis. load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset
and be mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
422
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance,
nuts for your vehicle. and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 428 for more
{CAUTION: information.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, Used Replacement Wheels

wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle, {CAUTION:
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
in which you or others could be injured. dangerous. You cannot know how it has
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, been used or how far it has been driven. It
and wheel nuts for replacement. could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
423
Tire Chains
{CAUTION: Use another type of traction device only if

its manufacturer recommends it for use
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough on your vehicle and tire size combination
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle and road conditions. Follow that
without the proper amount of clearance manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
can cause damage to the brakes, damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
suspension, or other vehicle parts. The readjust or remove the device if it is
area damaged by the tire chains could contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
cause you to lose control of your vehicle the wheels. If you do find traction devices
and you or others may be injured in a that will fit, install them on the front tires
crash. for front-wheel-drive vehicles. If your
vehicle has all-wheel drive, install traction
devices on either the front tires or all four
tires, but never on the rear tires only.
424
Accessory Inflator There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in
the glove box. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With an air pressure gage and nozzle adapters.
it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and
basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your
tires up to the proper pressure. {CAUTION:
The accessory inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To remove the Inflating something too much can make it
cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off. explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
This is the symbol on
instructions, and inflate any object only to
the accessory inflator
switch. its recommended pressure.
To use your accessory inflator system, do the

following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter,
if required, to the end of the hose that has the
pressure gage.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you
wish to inflate.
425
4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes,
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the
outlet. accessory inflator.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light To turn off the inflator, do the following:
in the switch will come on to show the system 1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first
is working. from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
If the accessory inflator system does not turn on or 2. Put the protective cap back on.
the light does not come on, the fuse may be blown 3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and
or installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit store in the glove box.
Breakers on page 463 or see your dealer for
service. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the
back of the cover and put it in place. Push down the
Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off tab to secure the cover.
after about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will
blink. After about one minute you can use the
system again. Press the inflator switch and the
indicator light will come on.
Notice: If you run the accessory inflator
longer than 30 minutes at a time, you could
damage the inflator. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Run the inflator
for short periods of time only.
426
If a Tire Goes Flat A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction you
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much under control by steering the way you want the
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off
expect and what to do: the road if possible.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel {CAUTION:
firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
427
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See Hazard while the vehicle is raised.
Warning Flashers on page 176 for more
information. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
{CAUTION: not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The from the one being changed. That would
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over be the tire, on the other side, at the
or fall on you or other people. You and opposite end of the vehicle.
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
428
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
The equipment you will need is located in the

storage compartment on the passenger’s side,
The following information will tell you next how to at the rear of the vehicle.
use the jack and change a tire.
1. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting
up the tab and pulling the cover off.
429
3. Separate the jack and remove the folding
wrench from the jack.
A. Jack D. Folding Wrench

B. Wing Bolt E. Wing Nut
C. Jacking F. J-Hook The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
Instructions folding wrench (B), wing nut (C), and J-hook (D).
2. Remove the jack and jacking tools by turning Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles
the wing bolt counterclockwise. without a Rear Convenience Center)
Lift up slightly on the jack to remove it from The compact spare tire is located under the
the bracket. Then take it out of the storage vehicle, behind the rear bumper. Use the spare
compartment. tire hoist to raise, lower and store the compact
spare tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 450
for more information about the compact spare.
430
A. Hoist Shaft D. Retainer 4. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
B. Folding Wrench E. Compact Spare Tire opening to remove the spare tire from the
cable.
C. Hoist Assembly
5. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable
1. Flip the rear cargo area carpet cut out to back up after removing the spare tire.
expose the hoist shaft. Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under
2. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft. the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
3. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise and Tools on page 444.
to lower the spare tire to the ground. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
Continue turning the wrench until the spare the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. page 436.
431
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the
cable all the way and then loosen it at least
two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground,
continue with Step 4 under “Removing the
Spare Tire (Vehicles without the Rear
Convenience Center)” listed previously.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the
ground, see Secondary Latch System on
page 441.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles
may be engaged causing the tire not to lower. with a Rear Convenience Center)
Do the following to check the cable: The compact spare tire is located under the
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. See Compact
visible. Spare Tire on page 450 for more information
about the compact spare.
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch
System on page 441.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the folding wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot over-tighten the cable.
432
1. Open the storage compartment door of the
convenience center that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the cap on the bottom of the
storage compartment.
2. Flip the cut out carpet that is located through
the hole of the storage compartment.
3. Attach the folding wrench into the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire to the ground.
Continue turning the wrench until the spare
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
A. Rear Convenience D. Hoist Shaft

Center E. Compact Spare Tire
B. Folding Wrench F. Retainer
C. Storage G. Hoist Shaft
Compartment Assembly
Cap Hole
433
5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch
opening to remove the spare tire from the may be engaged causing the tire not to lower.
cable.
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up after removing the spare tire.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools on page 444.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 436.
434
Do the following to check the cable: 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is cable all the way and then loosen it at least
visible. two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground,
2. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch
continue with Step 5 under “Removing
System on page 441.
the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by Convenience Center)” listed previously.
turning the folding wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You 5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the
cannot over-tighten the cable. ground, see Secondary Latch System on
page 441.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
435
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If there is a wheel cover, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the wheel wrench. They will
not come off. Then, using the flat end of the
wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover
until it comes off. Be careful; the edges may
be sharp. Do not try to remove the cover
with your bare hands.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove 2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove
the wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench. them, using the folding wrench.
Turn the handle about 180 degrees, then flip
the handle back to the starting position. This
avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each
turn. For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the
wheel lock key between the lock nut and folding
wrench. The key is supplied in the front
passenger door pocket.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and you
use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts,
you could damage the lock nut or wheel lock
key. Do not use an impact wrench to remove the
wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks.
436
3. Locate the notch
(A is 3.0 inches
(7.5 cm) from the {CAUTION:
front tire or B is
5.5 inches (14.0 cm) Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
from the rear tire). up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
The notch is located the jack you could be badly injured or
near each wheel in killed. Never get under a vehicle when
the vehicle’s body. it is supported only by a jack.
Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle

without positioning it correctly, you could
damage your vehicle. When raising your vehicle
on a jack, avoid contact with the rear axle
control arms.
Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact
spare tire near you.
437
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding
wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the
{CAUTION: vehicle far enough off the ground so that
there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
Raising your vehicle with the jack under the wheel well.
improperly positioned can damage the 6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. flat tire.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
4. Attach the folding

wrench to the jack,
and turn the wrench
clockwise to raise
the jack head
3 inches (7.6 cm).
438
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
which it is fastened, can make the wheel If you do, the nuts might come loose.
nuts become loose after time. The wheel Your wheel could fall off, causing a
could come off and cause an accident. serious accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from the places where the wheel 7. Remove any rust or
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, dirt from the wheel
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do bolts, mounting
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire surfaces and
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or spare wheel.
dirt off.
439
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
8. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding
Capacities and Specifications on page 469
wrench to the jack and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can

lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 469 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
440
9. Tighten the wheel Secondary Latch System
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence, Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
as shown. assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from
suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding
the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch
to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem
pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 444 for instructions on storing the
spare tire correctly.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover {CAUTION:
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
Before beginning this procedure read all
10. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the the instructions. Failure to read and follow
compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store the instructions could damage the hoist
the wheel cover securely in the rear of the assembly and you and others could get
vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or hurt. Read and follow the instructions
replaced.
listed next.
441
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If
the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the spare.
3. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and

1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure
raise the jack at least 10 turns.
at Step 3.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise until
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is
the jack under the center of the spare tire.
exposed.
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the
jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
442
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the secondary
latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
8. Disconnect the folding wrench from the jack

and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand
to push against the spare tire while firmly
pulling the jack out from under the spare tire
with the other hand.
7. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack.
443
9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
opening when the spare tire has been
completely lowered. Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles without
10. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the Stowable Seat and without Rear
cable back up if the cable is hanging. Convenience Center)
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire
using the hoist assembly until it has been
repaired or replaced.
A. D-Ring D. Valve Stem

B. Wing Nut E. Full-Size Tire
C. J-Hook
1. Flip up the D-ring located in the rear cargo area.
2. Lay the tire in the rear cargo area of the
vehicle with the valve stem up with the
center hole of the tire over the D-ring.
444
For vehicles with aluminum wheels, remove Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles
the center cap by tapping the back of the cap with a Rear Convenience Center)
with the folding wrench.
3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the
back of the jack access door. Assemble the
wing nut and the J-hook.
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the
D-ring through the center hole of the tire.
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to
the floor.
Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire
is secure and does not move.
6. Put back all tools as they were stored in the
jack storage compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment A. D-Ring E. Full-Size Tire
cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in B. Rear Convenience F. Cap on Bottom of
place and push down the tabs on the cover Center Storage
so that it rests in the groove. This secures the C. Wing Nut Compartment
cover in place. D. J-Hook
1. Open the center storage compartment door of
the rear convenience center.
2. Remove the cap on the bottom of the storage
compartment and flip the D-ring up.
445
3. Lay the tire on top of the center storage Storing the Flat Tire
compartment with the valve stem down. (Vehicles with a Stowable Seat)
Make sure you can see the D-ring through
the center hole of the tire.
6. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to
the floor.
jack storage compartment and put the
compartment cover back on. A. Rear Convenience D. Stowable Seat
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment Center Strap
cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in B. Full-Size Tire E. Cargo Net Hook
place and push down the tabs on the cover C. D-Ring F. J-Hook
so that it rests in the groove. This secures the G. Wing Nut
cover in place. 1. If the seatback is not in an upright position,
move it to an upright position.
2. There is a strap attached to each side of the
stowable seat. Hook the straps to the cargo
net hook in the rear of the vehicle.
446
3. Flip the D-ring so it is pointing outward. Storing the Flat Tire (Vehicles with a
4. Open the convenience center cover. Stowable Seatback Folded Flat)
5. Stand the full-size tire up, in the tray against
the back of the seat with the valve stem
pointing out.
8. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the
seatback.
9. Put back all tools as they were stored in the A. Stowable Seat D. J-Hook
jack storage compartment and put the B. Full-Size Tire E. D-Ring
compartment cover back on. C. Wing Nut
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment
cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in 1. Fold the seatback down and flip the D-ring up.
place and push down the tabs on the cover 2. Lay the tire on the seatback with the valve
so that it rests in the groove. This secures the stem pointing up with the center hole of the
cover in place. tire over the D-ring.
447
3. Remove the J-hook and the wing nut from the Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
4. Install the wing nut and the J-hook to the {CAUTION:
5. Tighten the wing nut to secure the tire to the Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
seatback. in the passenger compartment of the
6. Push and pull on the tire to make sure the tire vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
is secure and does not move. stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
jack storage compartment and put the proper place.
compartment cover back on.
Slip the tabs on the side of the compartment
cover into the cover opening. Push the cover in
place and push down the tabs on the cover
so that it rests in the groove. This secures the
cover in place.
448
3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through
the center hole of the spare tire.
{CAUTION: Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs
to be stored with the valve stem pointing 4. Attach the folding wrench to the hoist shaft.
down. If the spare tire is stored with 5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to lift
the valve stem pointing upwards, its the spare tire.
secondary latch will not work properly and 6. When the tire reaches the stabilizer bar, move
the spare tire could loosen and suddenly the tire over the bar, then continue to turn the
fall from your vehicle. If this happened folding wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire.
when your vehicle was being driven, the 7. When the tire is almost in the stored position,
tire might contact a person or another turn the tire so that the valve stem is towards
vehicle, causing injury and, of course, the rear of the vehicle.
damage to itself as well. Be sure the This will help when you check and maintain
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored tire pressure in the spare.
with its valve stem pointing down. 8. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench
1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at until you feel more than two clicks. This
the rear of the vehicle. Position the compact indicates that the compact spare tire is secure
spare tire so that the valve stem is pointed and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist
down facing the rear of the vehicle. cannot be overtightened.
2. Lower the cable to the ground. See Removing
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 429.
449
When you replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the
center cap, whichever your vehicle has. Tighten
them hand tight over the wheel nuts, using the
folding wrench.
Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
9. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the spare is made to perform well at speeds up to
tire moves, use the folding wrench to tighten 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
the cable. (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
10. Put back all tools as they were stored in your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you
the jack storage compartment and put the want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with
compartment cover back on. a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will
To put the cover back on, slip the tabs on last longer and be in good shape in case you need
the side of the cover into the cover opening. it again.
Push the cover in place and push down
the tabs on the cover so that it rests in the
groove. This secures the cover in place.
450
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, Appearance Care
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact spare
can get caught on the rails. That can damage Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
your vehicle.
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles. and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended
your spare tire and its wheel together. to remove particles from your upholstery. It is
important to keep your upholstery from becoming
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire interior may experience extremes of heat that
chains on your compact spare. could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which they
were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
451
Remove any accidental over-spray from other Do not clean your vehicle using the following
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaners or techniques:
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. • Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when remove a soil from any interior surface.
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you • Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
to the integrated radio antenna and the rear
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
window defogger. When cleaning the glass on
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
cleaner.
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become removal.
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. • Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
by opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
Dust may be removed from small buttons and gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles. • Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your cleaning.
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you • Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
can also obtain a product from your dealer to from the use of many organic solvents such
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery. as naptha, alcohol, etc.
452
Fabric/Carpet 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
process that was used with plain water.
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
as much of the soil as possible using one of the commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
following techniques: used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result,
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
clean the entire surface.
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible After the cleaning process has been completed, a
and then vacuum. paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
453
Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used Other Plastic Surfaces
to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is A soft cloth dampened with water may be used
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam soap solution can be used to gently remove dust
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on
removers on leather. Many commercial leather plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft
and protect leather may permanently change the plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your leather and are not appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior because they can clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on non-uniform manner.
your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss
on your instrument panel. The increase in
gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see
through the windshield under certain conditions.
454
Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry. The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
{CAUTION: keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
do, it may severely weaken them. In a sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
crash, they might not be able to provide soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
adequate protection. Clean safety belts vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 460. Do not use cleaning agents
Weatherstrips that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
very cold, damp weather frequent application may scratches and water spotting.
be required. See Recommended Fluids and High pressure car washes may cause water to
Lubricants on page 485. enter the vehicle.
455
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
Vehicle on page 455. the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
Finish Care painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
by hand may be necessary to remove residue weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products toll over a period of years. To help keep the
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in
Care/Appearance Materials on page 460. a garage or covered whenever possible.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive

polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes
and polishes that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes
that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish.
456
Windshield, Backglass, and Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Wiper Blades Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
If the windshield is not clear after using the chrome-plated wheels.
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
when running, wax, sap or other material may with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
be on the blade or windshield. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
Clean the outside of the windshield with a towel. A wax may then be applied.
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
with water. cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper chrome-plated wheels, you could damage
blades and affect their performance. Clean the the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in not be covered by your warranty. Use only
full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
the blade with water. chrome-plated wheels.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as The surface of these wheels is similar to the
necessary; replace blades that look worn. painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
457
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum Tires
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only. cleaner.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and products on your vehicle may damage the
buff off immediately after application. paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs Sheet Metal Damage
would not be covered by your warranty. Never If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning the warranty.
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
458
Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
major repair expense. vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
touch-up materials available from your dealer. dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
in your dealer’s body and paint shop. will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
Underbody Maintenance within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
459
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Removes dust,
Description Usage fingerprints, and surface
Finish Enhancer
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior contaminants. Spray on
Wax-Treated polishing cloth. and wipe off.
Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil, Removes swirl marks, fine
Remover and asphalt. Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or
and Polish stainless steel. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
White Sidewall Removes soil and black
Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Foaming Tire Shine Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
Low Gloss
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. No wiping necessary.
Removes dirt, grime, Medium foaming

Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints. shampoo. Cleans
Wash Wax Concentrate and lightly waxes.
Removes dirt and grime Biodegradable and
Chrome and Wire Wheel from chrome wheels and phosphate free.
Cleaner wire wheel covers.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
Spot Lifter vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
460
Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label

You will find this label on the inside of the access
panel located on the driver’s side of the rear of
the vehicle. It is very helpful if you ever need
to order parts. On this label, you will find
the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the • VIN
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can • Model designation
see it if you look through the windshield from
outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
• Paint information
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the • Production options and special equipment
certificates of title and registration. Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
461
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by internal fuses
Add-On Electrical Equipment in the fuse block. An electrical overload will cause
the lamps to go off and remain off. If this happens,
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered
Windshield Wiper Fuses
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
equipment can keep other components from internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor
working as they should. overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused
battery, even if your vehicle is not operating. by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your Power Windows and Other Power
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Options
Circuit breakers in the floor console fuse block
protect the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed.
462
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Floor Console Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be
sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the right
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor The floor console fuse block is located to the left
console fuse block and the underhood fuse and of the glove box near the floor. Pull the door
relay center. open to access the fuse block.
463
Fuse Usage
9 Empty
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamp
10 Flashers
11 Power Seats
12 Electronic Level Control (ELC)

Compressor
13 Liftgate and Endgate
14 Rear Auxiliary Power Outlet
Electronic Level Control (ELC)
15 Compressor Relay and Height
Sensor
Fuse Usage
16 Heated Mirrors
1 Empty
17 Power Mirrors
2 Steering Wheel Radio Controls
18 Ignition 1 Module
3 Power Door Locks
19 Turn Signal Switch
4 Empty
21 Rear Defogger
5 Empty
22 Airbag Module
6 Empty
24 TCC Switch
7 Empty
25 HVAC Blower Motor
8 Empty
464
Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
26 HVAC Mode and Temperature Instrument Panel Cluster, Climate

Motors and Head-Up Display 41 Control, Security LED and Remote
Keyless Entry Mode
28 Accessory Power
42 PASS-Key® III
29 Windshield Wipers and Washer
44 Body Control Module (BCM)
Instrument Panel Cluster,
30 Body Control Module (BCM), 46
Automatic Occupant Sensing
PASS-Key® III Module
31 Park Lock Ignition Key Solenoid
32 Rear Window Wiper/Washer Relay Usage
34 Power Sunroof 20 Rear Defogger Relay
35 Power Windows 23 Ignition Relay
Map Lamps, Courtesy Lamps and 27 Accessory Relay

36 Instrument Panel Lights 33 Retained Accessory Power Relay
37 Radio 43 Accessory Diode
38 UQ3 Radio Amplifier 45 Back-Up Lamps
39 Head-Up Display
40 Hazard Flashers
465
Underhood Fuse Block
Fuse Usage
1 Fuel Pump
This fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the passenger’s side of the 2 Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on 3 Horn
page 364 for more information on location.
4 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The back-up lamp relay (A) is located behind and
to the left of the underhood fuse block. 5 Engine Control Module (ECM)
To remove the cover, press the two tabs in and lift
up the cover.
466
Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
6 Powertrain Relay 21 Engine Control Module (ECM)
7 Powertrain Sensors 23 Passenger’s High-Beam Headlamp
8 Transmission Control Module (TCM) 24 Vent Solenoids
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 25 DVD
9 Solenoids Valves
26 Front Fog Lamps
10 Oxygen Sensor/MAF Sensor
27 Ignition Relay
11 Fuel Injectors (Even)
28 Body Control Module (BCM)
13 Fuel Injectors (Odd)
29 S-Band
14 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
30 Not Used
15 Passenger’s Low-Beam Headlamp
31 Cruise Control
16 Transmission
32 Front Power Outlets/Lights, OnStar®
17 Driver’s Low-Beam Headlamp
33 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock
18 Driver’s High-Beam Headlamp Control System
19 Ignition Switch Battery Power 34 Starter Solenoid Battery Fuse
20 Parking Lamps 35 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Motor
38 Engine Cooling Fan 2
467
Fuse Usage Relay Usage
39 Engine Cooling Fan 1 49 Horn
Main Battery Fuse for Retained 50 Fuel Pump
40 Accessory Power Relay and
Accessory Relay 51 Air Conditioning Clutch
Main Battery Fuse for Heated Seats, 52 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
41
Air Conditioning, Defogger
53 Low-Beam Headlamps
Main Battery Fuse for Power
44 Outlets, Level Control, Power Seats, 54 Parking Lamps
Mirrors, and Body Computer 55 High-Beam Headlamps
Main Battery Fuse for Climate 56 Fog Lamps
46 Control Blower and Ignition 3 Relay
57 Starter Relay
Main Battery Fuse for Ignition
Switch, Radio, Heads-Up Display 58 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
47 (HUD), Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Instrument Cluster, Air 59 Powertrain
Conditioning, and Body Computer
60 Cooling Fan 2
Diode for Air Conditioning
70 § Compressor Clutch 61 Cooling Fan 1
62 Ignition
§ 71 Diode for Ignition
468
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 485 for more information.
Capacities
Application English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Automatic Transaxle (Pan Removal and Replacement) 7.4 qt 7.0 L
Cooling System 11.3 qt 10.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter 4.0 qt 3.8 L
Fuel Capacity 18.0 gal 68.1 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap
3.5L V6 L Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
469
✍ NOTES
470
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 472 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 480
Introduction ............................................... 472 At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 481
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 472 At Least Once a Month ............................. 481
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 473 At Least Once a Year ............................... 482
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 473 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 485
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 475 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 486
Additional Required Services ..................... 478 Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 487
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 479 Maintenance Record .................................. 488
471
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
Introduction inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
and change as recommended.
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The

Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
472
Your Vehicle and the Environment Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep We at General Motors want to help you keep your
your vehicle in good working condition, but also vehicle in good working condition. But we do
helps the environment. All recommended not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle drive very short distances only a few times a week.
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air Or you may drive long distances all the time in
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be Because of all the different ways people use their
sure to maintain your vehicle properly. vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements. So
please read the following and note how you
drive. If you have any questions on how to keep
your vehicle in good condition, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer.
473
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within {CAUTION:
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Performing maintenance work on a
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 332.
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
legal driving limits. Do your own maintenance work only if
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline you have the required know-how and the
Octane on page 356. proper tools and equipment for the job. If
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on you have any doubt, see your GM
page 475 should be performed when indicated. Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
See Additional Required Services on page 478 and technician do the work. See Doing Your
Maintenance Footnotes on page 479 for further Own Service Work on page 355.
information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,

unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
474
If you want to purchase service information, see Scheduled Maintenance
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 510. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes
on, it means that service is required for your
Owner Checks and Services on page 480 tells you vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
what should be checked, when to check it, and possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in possible that, if you are driving under the best
good condition. conditions, the engine oil life system may
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended over a year. However, your engine oil and
Fluids and Lubricants on page 485 and Normal filter must be changed at least once a year and at
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 486. this time the system must be reset. Your GM
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
are used. All parts should be replaced and all technicians who will perform this work using
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else genuine GM parts and reset the system.
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
475
If the engine oil life system is ever reset Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service. 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever Maintenance II was performed.
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
page 368 for information on the Engine Oil Life previous service performed was Maintenance I.
System and resetting the system. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on 10 months or more since the last
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections service or if the message has not come on at all
are required. Required services are described for one year.
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
476
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 365. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 368. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 370. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 416 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on • •
page 481.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
• •
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k). •
477
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 370.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
• • •
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
•
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
•
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (m).
478
Maintenance Footnotes (d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, the windshield.
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
parking brake adjustment. anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
cracks, chafing, etc. and have them repaired or replaced. The
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. More
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside frequent lubrication may be required when
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
recommended at least once a year. silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
will make them last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
479
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if (k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of the filter may require replacement more often.
these conditions: (l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
− In heavy city traffic where the outside inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher. (m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
− In hilly or mountainous terrain. necessary.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
service.
These owner checks and services should be
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
service can be complex; you should have the safety, dependability, and emission control
your dealer perform this service. See Engine performance of your vehicle. Your GM
Coolant on page 375 for what to use. Inspect Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap, checks and services.
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
(j) Check system for interference or binding and to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
as needed. Replace any components that have Lubricants on page 485.
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
480
At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks Tire Inflation Check
at each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
Engine Oil Level Check they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 365 for Pressure on page 413. Check to make sure the
further details. spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 428.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure Tire Wear Inspection
to keep your engine oil at the proper level Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
can cause damage to your engine not covered highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
by your warranty. service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Engine Coolant Level Check
Inspection and Rotation on page 416.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 375 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
481
At Least Once a Year 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
Starter Switch Check NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough

room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 135.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it
starts.
482
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
{CAUTION: • The ignition should turn to OFF only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the • The ignition key should come out only in OFF.
vehicle moves, you or others could be Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
injured. is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough

room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 135.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
483
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
Park (P) Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION: With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
When you are doing this check, your from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle could begin to move. You or vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
others could be injured and property • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
could be damaged. Make sure there is ability: With the engine running, shift to
room in front of your vehicle in case it PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the followed by the regular brake.
regular brake at once should the vehicle Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
begin to move. required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
484
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants GM Power
Power Steering (GM Part No. Steering Fluid
U.S. 89021184,
System in Canada 89021186).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
your dealer. Transaxle Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays Hood Latch
the American Petroleum Institute Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Certified for Gasoline Engines Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Engine Oil starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench® Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
oil meets all the requirements for Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
your vehicle. To determine the and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Pawl
engine, see Engine Oil on page 365. Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Hinges and
® Rear Folding (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL Seat in Canada 10953474).
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 375. Weatherstrip Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Conditioning Silicone Grease
Windshield
Washer GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent. (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
485
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM
dealer.
Part GM® Part Number ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 10354942 A1208C
Engine Oil Filter 25010792 PF47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit 10322538 CF123
Spark Plugs 12568387 41-101
Windshield Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 10413111 —
Passenger’s Side – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 10317151 —
Rear Wiper Blade – 15.7 inches (40.0 cm) 10324491 —
486
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 Engine
487
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 472. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 480 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
488
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
489
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
490
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 492 Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 508
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 492 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ................................. 495 United States Government ..................... 508
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 496 Canadian Government ............................ 509
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 496 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 497 General Motors ...................................... 509
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 498 Service Publications Ordering
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 501 Information ............................................. 510
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ...................................... 503
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 504
491
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
Information cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Buick
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact General
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important Motors of Canada Customer Communication
to your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
concerns with the sales transaction or the 1-800-263-7854 (French).
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
GM dealer’s sales or service departments.
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions
have the following information available to give
of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.
the Customer Assistance Representative:
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: • Vehicle Identification Number. This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member plate at the top left of the instrument panel.
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
• Dealership name and location
has already been reviewed with the sales, • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of When contacting Buick, please remember that your
the dealership or the general manager. concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
492
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
Motors and your dealer are committed to making the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
sure you are completely satisfied with your new following address:
vehicle. However, in the United States, if you BBB Auto Line Program
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to Suite 800
enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
program administered by the Council of Better This program is available in all 50 states and the
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
be required to resort to this informal dispute limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
resolution program prior to filing a court action, use this program.
of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
493
STEP THREE — Canadian Owner: In the event For further information concerning eligibility in
that you do not feel your concerns have been the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
addressed after following the procedure outlined in (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Steps one and two, General Motors of Canada Alternatively you may call the General Motors
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program. (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving the following address. Your inquiry should
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
provides for the review of the facts involved by Number (VIN).
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an Mediation/Arbitration Program
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program c/o Customer Communication Centre
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement General Motors of Canada Limited
process, from the time you file your complaint Mail Code: CA1-163-005
to the final decision, should be completed 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
494
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
(United States only) on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
can be found in one place. you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to: − My Showroom: Find and save information on
• Get e-mail service reminders. vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
vehicle, including tips and videos and address and phone number for each of
an electronic version of this owner manual. your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
and maintenance schedule.
your vehicle.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide. − My Preferences: Manage your profile,
• Receive special promotions and privileges subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
only available to members. with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
updated information and to register your vehicle. Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
495
Customer Assistance for Text Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Telephone (TTY) Users
From Puerto Rico:
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of 1-800-496-9992 (English)
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Telephones (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment Fax Number: 313-381-0022
available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any From U.S. Virgin Islands
TTY user can communicate with Buick by 1-800-496-9994
dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada Fax Number: 313-381-0022
can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Offices General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
number for assistance. However, if a customer Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Buick, the letter should be www.gmcanada.com
addressed to: 1-800-263-3777 (English)
United States — Customer Assistance 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
Buick Customer Assistance Center devices (TTYs))
P.O. Box 33136 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
www.Buick.com
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
496
Overseas — Customer Assistance GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Program
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center This program, available to qualified applicants, can
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
Col. Lomas de Bezares aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
01-800-508-0000 scooter lift.
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
497
Roadside Assistance Program The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
In the U.S. call 1-800-252-1112. in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
In Canada call 1-800-268-6800. period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, you customer to get to the nearest service station
are automatically enrolled in the Roadside (approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
Assistance program. This value-added service is in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you restricted. For safety reasons, propane
drive in the city or travel the open road. and other alternative fuels will not be provided
Who is Covered? through this service.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle • Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving driver must present the vehicle registration and
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
not eligible for coverage. Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. If
your vehicle will not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized dealership. In
the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
498
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or We will make every attempt to send your
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
warranty service or in the event of a but it is best to allow three weeks before your
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out planned departure date. Trip routing requests
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand, will be limited to six per calendar year.
mud, or snow. • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: In
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tire the event of a warranty related vehicle
in good condition will be covered at no charge. disablement, while en route and over
The customer is responsible for the repair or 250 kilometres from original point of departure,
replacement of the tire if not covered by a you may qualify for trip interruption expense
warrantable failure. assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which reimbursement of up to a maximum of
require a battery jump start will be covered at $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
no charge. $50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
Additional Services for Canadian (maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
Customers you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
repaired.
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
choice of either the most direct route or the a copy of the repair order are required.
most scenic route to your destination, Once authorization has been given, your
anywhere in North America, along with any advisor will help you make any necessary
helpful travel information we may have arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
pertaining to your trip. To request this service, interruption expense assistance.
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
499
• Alternative Service: There may be times, • Model, year, color, and license plate number.
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize Number, and delivery date of the vehicle.
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100 upon • Description of the problem.
submission of the original receipt to Roadside While we hope you never have the occasion to
Assistance. use our service, it is added security while traveling
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered for you and your family. Remember, we are
under Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty for U.S. only a phone call away. U.S. customers call Buick
customers, and the duration of the Base Warranty Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, TTY
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new users, call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for call 1-800-268-6800.
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are the Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited
responsibility of the driver. reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, to an owner or driver when, in their sole
please provide the following to the Roadside discretion, the claims become excessive in
Assistance Representative: frequency or type of occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
telephone number. the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Buick and General Motors of Canada
• Telephone number of your location. Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
• Location of the vehicle. discontinue the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
500
Towing and Road Service Exclusions Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
warranty coverage information.
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing Scheduling Service Appointments
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an
Courtesy Transportation appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
To enhance your ownership experience, we and and advising your service consultant of your
our participating dealers are proud to offer transportation needs, your dealer can help
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support minimize your inconvenience.
program for new vehicles. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper service department immediately, keep driving it
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
Warranty, interim transportation may be available please call your dealership, let them know this, and
under the Courtesy Transportation program. ask for instructions.
Several courtesy transportation options are If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
when warranty repairs are required. early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
501
Transportation Options for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
Warranty service can generally be completed supported by original receipts.
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by Courtesy Rental Vehicle
providing several transportation options. Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
offer you one of the following: a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
Shuttle Service kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering supported by original receipts. This requires that
Courtesy Transportation and participating you sign and complete a rental agreement
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
you to your destination with minimal interruption provider requirements. Requirements vary and
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way may include minimum age requirements, insurance
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area. for fuel usage charges and may also be
Public Transportation or Fuel responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
Reimbursement excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the as a courtesy rental.
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.
customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
502
Additional Program Information control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
All program options, such as shuttle service, may operations to facilitate repair of detected
not be available at every dealer. Please contact malfunctions; other information is stored only
your dealer for specific information about in a crash event by computer systems, such
availability. All Courtesy Transportation as those commonly called Event Data
arrangements will be administered by appropriate Recorders (EDR).
dealer personnel.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy in your vehicle may record information about the
Transportation at any time and to resolve all condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms such as data related to engine speed, brake
and conditions described herein at its sole application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
discretion. belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information
Vehicle Data Collection and Event has been used to improve vehicle crash
Data Recorders performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
has a number of sophisticated computer systems airplanes, these on-board systems do not record
that monitor and control several aspects of the sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board occupants.
vehicle computers to monitor emission control
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the
vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to
provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver
503
To read this information, special equipment is Others, such as law enforcement, may have
needed and access to the vehicle or the device access to the special equipment that can read the
that stores the data is required. GM will not access information if they have access to the vehicle
information about a crash event or share it with or the device that stores the data.
others other than: If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the for information on its operations and data
lessee, collection.
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office, Collision Damage Repair
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
the discovery process, or damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
• as required by law. technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
GM may:
value, and safety performance can be
• use the data for GM research needs, compromised in subsequent collisions.
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
504
Collision Parts Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
with the same materials and construction methods these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
choice to assure that your vehicle’s designed are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain parts are not covered by that warranty.
your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be Repair Facility
used for repair. These parts are typically removed GM also recommends that you choose a collision
from vehicles that were total losses in prior repair facility that meets your needs before you
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
recycled original equipment GM part, may technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s be able to recommend a collision repair center that
originally designed appearance and safety has GM-trained technicians and comparable
performance, however, the history of these parts equipment.
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
505
Insuring Your Vehicle If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with Here is what to do if you are involved in an
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. accident.
There are significant differences in the quality • Try to relax and then check to make sure you
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced that no one else in your vehicle, or the
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting other vehicle, is injured.
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance • If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
companies will not specify aftermarket collision Do not leave the scene of an accident until
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend all matters have been taken care of. Move
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired your vehicle only if its position puts you
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
insurance coverage is not available from your police officer.
current insurance carrier, consider switching • Give only the necessary and requested
to another insurance carrier. information to police and other parties involved
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
require you to have insurance that assures repairs condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement against post-accident legal action.
parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be • If you need roadside assistance, call GM
charged at the end of your lease for poor quality Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
repairs. Assistance Program on page 498 for more
information.
506
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where • If possible, call your insurance company from
the towing service will be taking it. Get a the scene of the accident. They will walk you
card from the tow truck operator or write down through the information they will need. If they
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
the phone number. department headquarters the next day and you
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
insurance information and registration if you laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
keep these items in your vehicle. especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name, • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
address, phone number, driver’s license your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, or a private collision repair facility to fix the
model and model year, Vehicle Identification damage, make sure you are comfortable with
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy them. Remember, you will have to feel
number, and a general description of the comfortable with their work for a long time.
damage to the other vehicle. • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
507
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair If another party’s insurance company is paying for
Process the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
In the event that your vehicle requires damage company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active have no contractual limits with that company. In
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined such cases, you can have control of the repair and
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or parts choices as long as cost stays within
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that reasonable limits.
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts Reporting Safety Defects
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty. Reporting Safety Defects to the
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must United States Government
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this could cause a crash or could cause injury or
with your repair professional, and insist on death, you should immediately inform the National
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
leased you may be obligated to have the in addition to notifying General Motors.
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
508
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Reporting Safety Defects to
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to General Motors
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Administrator, NHTSA Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
400 Seventh Street, SW. you will notify us.
Washington, D.C. 20590 Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
You can also obtain other information about motor Buick Customer Assistance Center
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
Reporting Safety Defects to In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
the Canadian Government (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your General Motors of Canada Limited
vehicle has a safety defect, you should Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
509
Service Publications Ordering Service Bulletins
Information Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors
Service Manuals cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair to assist in the diagnosis and service of your
information on engines, transmission, axle vehicle.
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
Case Unit Repair Manual (1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from
This manual provides information on unit repair
Helm, Inc.
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles, RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
and transfer cases.
510
Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
Eastern Time
information about the vehicle. The owner For Credit Card Orders Only
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
all models. the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, Or you can write to:
and Warranty Booklet. Helm, Incorporated
RETAIL SELL PRICE: P.O. Box 07130
$35.00US + Processing Fee Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
RETAIL SELL PRICE: for delivery.
$25.00US + Processing Fee
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
Current and Past Model Order Forms quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are make checks payable in U.S. funds.
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
511
✍ NOTES
512
A Airbag System (cont.)
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 299
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 354 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 425 System .................................................... 299
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 199 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 307
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 220
Vehicle ..................................................... 103 Appearance Care
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 357 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 457
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 462 Care of Safety Belts ................................ 455
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 370 Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 459
Air Conditioning ......................... 200, 203, 206 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 456
Airbag Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 451
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 217 Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 453
Readiness Light ....................................... 215 Finish Care .............................................. 456
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Finish Damage ......................................... 459
Module (SDM) .......................................... 503 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Airbag System ............................................... 88 Plastic Surfaces .................................... 454
Adding Equipment to Your Leather .................................................... 454
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 103 Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 458
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 96 Tires ........................................................ 458
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 98 Underbody Maintenance ........................... 459
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 102 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 460
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 95 Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 455
What Will You See After an Airbag Weatherstrips ........................................... 455
Inflates? ................................................. 96 Windshield, Backglass, and
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 93 Wiper Blades ........................................ 457
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 91
513
Ashtray(s) .................................................... 200 Brake
Audio System(s) .......................................... 250 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 307
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 296 Emergencies ............................................ 309
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 298 Low Fluid Warning Message .................... 232
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 298 Parking .................................................... 135
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 299 System Warning Light .............................. 219
Navigation/Radio System, see Brakes ........................................................ 389
Navigation Manual ................................ 277 Braking ....................................................... 306
Radio with CD ......................................... 252 Braking in Emergencies ............................... 309
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 262 Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 127
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 293 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 399
Setting the Time ...................................... 252 Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 399
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 296 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 297 Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 399
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 299 Replacement Bulbs .................................. 404
Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 187 Taillamps and Back-Up Lamps ................. 402
Automatic Transaxle Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 401
Fluid ........................................................ 372 Buying New Tires ........................................ 418
Operation ................................................. 132
C
B Calibration ................................................... 238
Battery ........................................................ 393 California Fuel ............................................. 357
Run-Down Protection ............................... 192 California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 355
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 323 Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Bench Seat, Split .......................................... 15 Capacities and Specifications ...................... 469
Captain Chairs, Rear ..................................... 21
514
Carbon Monoxide .............. 118, 140, 327, 340 Child Restraints (cont.)
Care of Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Safety Belts ............................................. 455 Rear Seat Position ................................. 82
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 298 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 298 Front Seat Position ................................. 84
Cargo Cover ............................................... 165 Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 68
Cargo Lamp ................................................ 192 Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 200
Cell Phone Storage Area ............................. 159 Cleaning
Center Rear Passenger Position, Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 457
Safety Belts ............................................... 51 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 456
Chains, Tire ................................................. 424 Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 453
Change Engine Oil Message ....................... 230 Finish Care .............................................. 456
Charging System Indicator Message ............ 228 Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 451
Check Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Engine Light ............................................ 222 Plastic Surfaces .................................... 454
Tire Pressure System ............................... 414 Leather .................................................... 454
Check Gas Cap Message ........................... 231 Tires ........................................................ 458
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 362 Underbody Maintenance ........................... 459
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 459 Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 455
Child Restraints Weatherstrips ........................................... 455
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 64 Windshield, Backglass, and
Infants and Young Children ........................ 60 Wiper Blades ........................................ 457
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 69 Climate Control System ............................... 200
Older Children ........................................... 57 Dual ......................................................... 203
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Dual Automatic ......................................... 206
Outside Seat Position ............................. 79 Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 210
515
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 504 Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 53 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 450 United States Government .................... 508
Compass ..................................................... 238 Roadside Assistance Program .................. 498
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 122 Service Publications Ordering
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 306 Information ........................................... 510
Convenience Center, Rear ........................... 165
Convenience Net ......................................... 164
Coolant D
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 221 Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 186
Engine Temperature Warning Message .... 227 Defensive Driving ........................................ 302
Heater, Engine ......................................... 131 Delayed Lighting .......................................... 190
SGCM, Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 226 Delayed Locking .......................................... 116
Cooling System ........................................... 381 DIC Compass .............................................. 238
Cruise Control ............................................. 181 Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 355
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 158 Door
Customer Assistance Information Ajar Warning Message ............................. 230
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 501 Delayed Locking ...................................... 116
Customer Assistance for Text Locks ....................................................... 114
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 496 Power Door Locks ................................... 115
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 496 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 116
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 492 Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 116
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 497 Driver
Reporting Safety Defects to Position, Safety Belt ................................... 36
General Motors ..................................... 509 Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 235
Reporting Safety Defects to the DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 236
Canadian Government .......................... 509
516
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.) Electrical System (cont.)
DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 240 Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 462
Driving Engine
At Night ................................................... 317 Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 370
City .......................................................... 321 Battery ..................................................... 393
Defensive ................................................. 302 Change Oil Message ............................... 230
Drunken ................................................... 303 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 222
Freeway ................................................... 322 Coolant .................................................... 375
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 325 Coolant Heater ......................................... 131
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 318 Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 221
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 332 Coolant Temperature Warning Message ... 227
Winter ...................................................... 327 Drive Belt Routing .................................... 487
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 206 Engine Compartment Overview ................ 364
Dual Climate Control System ....................... 203 Exhaust ................................................... 140
DVD Oil ........................................................... 365
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 277 Oil Life System ........................................ 368
Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 380
Overheating ............................................. 378
E Reduced Power Message ........................ 228
Electrical System Starting .................................................... 129
Add-On Equipment ................................... 462 Entry Lighting .............................................. 189
Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 463 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 503
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 463 Exit Delay, Headlamp .................................. 189
Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 462 Exit Lighting ................................................ 190
Power Windows and Other Power Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 56
Options ................................................. 462 Exterior Lamps ............................................ 185
Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 466
517
F Fuel (cont.)
Gage ....................................................... 225
Filter Gasoline Octane ...................................... 356
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 370 Gasoline Specifications ............................ 356
Finish Damage ............................................ 459 Low Warning Message ............................. 232
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 299 Fuses
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 176 Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 463
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 179 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 463
Flat Tire ...................................................... 427 Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 466
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 428 Windshield Wiper ..................................... 462
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 444
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle .................................
Power Steering ........................................
372
387
G
Gage
Windshield Washer .................................. 388 Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 221
Fog Lamps .................................................. 187 Fuel ......................................................... 225
Front Armrest Storage Area ......................... 160 Speedometer ........................................... 213
Front Console Storage Area ........................ 160 Tachometer .............................................. 214
Front Reading Lamps .................................. 191 Garage Door Opener .......................... 147, 148
Fuel ............................................................ 356 Gas, Check Cap Message ........................... 231
Additives .................................................. 357 Gasoline
California Fuel .......................................... 357 Octane ..................................................... 356
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 361 Specifications ........................................... 356
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 359 Glove Box ................................................... 158
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 358 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 497
518
H Horn ............................................................ 176
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
Hatch Ajar Warning Message ...................... 230 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 35
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 176
Head Restraints ............................................ 15
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 462
Headlamps
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 128
Automatic Headlamp System .................... 187 Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 60
Bulb Replacement .................................... 399 Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 413
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 186 Instrument Panel
Exit Delay ................................................ 189 Overview .................................................. 174
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 179 Switchbank .............................................. 192
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 399 Instrument Panel (I/P)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Brightness ................................................ 188
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 399 Cluster ..................................................... 212
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 179 Interior Lamps ............................................. 188
Head-Up Display (HUD) .............................. 193 Interior Lamps Control ................................. 188
Heated Seats ................................................ 11
Heater ................................................ 200, 203
Heater ......................................................... 206
Highbeam Out Warning Message ................ 235
J
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 324 Jump Starting .............................................. 394
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 325
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 362 K
Release ................................................... 363 Keyless Entry System ................................. 110
Keys ........................................................... 109
519
L Light (cont.)
TCS Warning Light .................................. 220
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 407 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 220
Lamps Lighting
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 192 Delayed ................................................... 190
Cargo ...................................................... 192 Entry ........................................................ 189
Exterior .................................................... 185 Exit .......................................................... 190
Fog .......................................................... 187 Perimeter ................................................. 191
Front Reading .......................................... 191 Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 332
Interior ..................................................... 188 Lockout Protection ....................................... 118
Interior Control ......................................... 188 Locks
Rear Reading .......................................... 191 Delayed Locking ...................................... 116
LATCH System Door ........................................................ 114
Child Restraints ......................................... 69 Lockout Protection ................................... 118
Level Control ............................................... 339 Power Door ............................................. 115
Liftgate ........................................................ 118 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 116
Light Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 116
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 215 Loss of Control ........................................... 315
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 220 Low Brake Fluid Warning Message ............. 232
Brake System Warning ............................. 219 Low Fuel Warning Message ........................ 232
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 222 Low Oil Pressure Message .......................... 229
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 217 Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ........... 231
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 215 Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 10
520
M Message (cont.)
Door Ajar Warning ................................... 230
Maintenance Schedule Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 227
Additional Required Services .................... 478 Highbeam Out Warning ............................ 235
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 481 Low Brake Fluid Warning ......................... 232
At Least Once a Month ............................ 481 Low Fuel Warning .................................... 232
At Least Once a Year .............................. 482 Low Oil Pressure ..................................... 229
Introduction .............................................. 472 Low Washer Fluid Warning ...................... 231
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 479 Park Lamp Warning ................................. 234
Maintenance Record ................................ 488 PASS-Key® III Security ............................. 231
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 472 Program Mode ......................................... 233
Normal Maintenance Rear Hatch Ajar Warning ......................... 230
Replacement Parts ............................... 486 Reduced Engine Power ............................ 228
Owner Checks and Services .................... 480 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 485 Low Warning ........................................ 234
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 475 Service Traction System Warning ............. 226
Using ....................................................... 473 Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 233
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 473 Traction Active ......................................... 227
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 222 Mirrors
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10 Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 142
Manual Seats .................................................. 9 Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 143
Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 11 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 143
Message Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 143
Center ..................................................... 225 Outside Power Mirror ............................... 142
Change Engine Oil ................................... 230 MyGMLink.com ............................................ 495
Charging System Indicator ....................... 228
Check Gas Cap ....................................... 231
521
N Outside (cont.)
Overhead Console ....................................... 159
Navigation/Radio System, see Overheated Engine Protection
Navigation Manual ................................... 277 Operating Mode ....................................... 380
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 127 Owner Checks and Services ....................... 480
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 486 Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
O P
Odometer .................................................... 213 Paint, Damage ............................................ 459
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 213 Park Aid ...................................................... 196
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 313 Park Lamp Warning Message ...................... 234
Oil Park (P)
Engine ..................................................... 365 Shifting Into ............................................. 136
Pressure Message ................................... 229 Shifting Out of ......................................... 138
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 368 Parking
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 57 Assist ....................................................... 196
Online Owner Center ................................... 495 Brake ....................................................... 135
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 144 Over Things That Burn ............................ 139
Other Warning Devices ................................ 176 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 217
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 210 Passenger Sensing System ........................... 98
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 199 Passing ....................................................... 314
Outside PASS-Key® III ............................................. 124
Convex Mirror .......................................... 143 PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 125
Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 143 PASS-Key® III Security Message ................. 231
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 143 Perimeter Lighting ....................................... 191
Power Mirror ............................................ 142
522
Power Radios (cont.)
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 199 Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 262
Door Locks .............................................. 115 Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 293
Electrical System ..................................... 462 Setting the Time ...................................... 252
Reduced Engine Message ....................... 228 Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 296
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 129 Understanding Reception ......................... 297
Seat .......................................................... 10 Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 116
Steering Fluid .......................................... 387 Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .............. 230
Windows .................................................. 121 Rear Outside Passenger Positions,
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 56 Safety Belts ............................................... 47
Program Mode Message ............................. 233 Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 191
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 116 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 53
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 293
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 277
Q Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 15
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 34 Rear Storage Area ...................................... 160
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 180
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 142
R Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 13
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................ 378 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 485
Radios ........................................................ 250 Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 338
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 298 Reduced Engine Power Message ................ 228
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 298 Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 110
Navigation/Radio System, see Remote Keyless Entry System,
Navigation Manual ................................ 277 Operation ................................................. 111
Radio with CD ......................................... 252
523
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery
Low Warning Message ............................. 234
S
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Safety Belt
Spare Tire ................................................ 436 Pretensioners ............................................. 56
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 429 Reminder Light ........................................ 215
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 404 Safety Belts
Replacement, Windshield ............................. 404 Care of .................................................... 455
Reporting Safety Defects Center Rear Passenger Position ................ 51
Canadian Government ............................. 509 Driver Position ........................................... 36
General Motors ........................................ 509 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 35
United States Government ....................... 508 Questions and Answers About
Restraint System Check Safety Belts ............................................ 34
Checking the Restraint Systems ............... 104 Rear Outside Passenger Positions ............. 47
Replacing Restraint System Parts Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 53
After a Crash ........................................ 105 Right Front Passenger Position .................. 46
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 129 Safety Belt Extender .................................. 56
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 46
Safety Belts ............................................... 46 Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 30
Roadside Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 45
Assistance Program ................................. 498 Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 332 Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 475
Roof Rack System ...................................... 161 Seats
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 487 Captain Chairs ........................................... 21
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 141 Head Restraints ......................................... 15
Heated Seats ............................................. 11
Manual ........................................................ 9
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10
524
Seats (cont.) Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 136
Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 11 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 138
Power Seats .............................................. 10 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 45
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 15 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 178
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 13 Spare Tire
Split Bench Seats ...................................... 15 Accessory Inflator ..................................... 425
Stowable Seat ........................................... 26 Compact .................................................. 450
Secondary Latch System ............................. 441 Installing .................................................. 436
Securing a Child Restraint Removing ................................................ 429
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 82 Storing ..................................................... 444
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 79 Specifications, Capacities ............................ 469
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 84 Speedometer ............................................... 213
Security Message, PASS-Key® III ................ 231 Split Bench Seats ......................................... 15
Service ........................................................ 354 Starting Your Engine ................................... 129
Accessories and Modifications .................. 354 Steering ...................................................... 311
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 296
Your Vehicle ......................................... 356 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 177
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 355 Storage Areas
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 355 Cell Phone Storage Area ......................... 159
Engine Soon Light ................................... 222 Convenience Net ..................................... 164
Publications Ordering Information ............. 510 Cupholder(s) ............................................ 158
Traction System Warning Message .......... 226 Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 160
Vehicle Soon Message ............................. 233 Front Armrest Storage Area ...................... 160
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 102 Glove Box ................................................ 158
Setting the Time .......................................... 252 Overhead Console ................................... 159
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 458 Rear Convenience Center ........................ 165
525
Storage Areas (cont.) Tires ........................................................... 406
Rear Storage Area ................................... 160 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Roof Rack System ................................... 161 Wheels, Cleaning .................................. 457
Stowable Seat ............................................... 26 Buying New Tires ..................................... 418
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 331 Chains ..................................................... 424
Sun Visors .................................................. 122 Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 428
Sunroof ....................................................... 169 Check Tire Pressure System .................... 414
Surge Tank Pressure Cap, SGCM Cleaning .................................................. 458
Coolant .................................................... 226 Compact Spare Tire ................................. 450
Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .................... 192 Different Size ........................................... 420
If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 427
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 413
T Inflator, Accessory .................................... 425
Tachometer ................................................. 214 Inspection and Rotation ............................ 416
Taillamps Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 436
Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 402 Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 436
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 401 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 429
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 220 Secondary Latch System ......................... 441
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 296 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 444
Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 122 Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 407
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 122 Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 410
PASS-Key® III .......................................... 124 Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 420
PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 125 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 422
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 177 Wheel Replacement ................................. 422
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 418
526
Towing Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 420
Recreational Vehicle ................................. 338 Universal Home Remote System ........ 147, 148
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 340 Operation ........................................ 149, 154
Your Vehicle ............................................. 337
Traction
Active Message ....................................... 227 V
Control System (TCS) .............................. 310 Vehicle
Control System Warning Light .................. 220 Control ..................................................... 306
Service Traction System Warning Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Message ............................................... 226 Loading .................................................... 332
Transaxle Service Soon Message ............................ 233
Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 372 Symbols ...................................................... 5
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 132 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Trip Odometer ............................................. 213 Recorders ................................................ 503
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 178 Vehicle Identification
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 177 Number (VIN) .......................................... 461
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 461
Vehicle Personalization
U DIC .......................................................... 240
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 196 Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 210
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 297 Visors .......................................................... 122
527
W Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 457
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 211 Replacement ............................................ 404
Warnings Washer .................................................... 180
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 176 Washer Fluid ........................................... 388
Other Warning Devices ............................ 176 Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 404
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4 Wiper Fuses ............................................ 462
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5 Wipers ..................................................... 179
Washer Fluid Low Warning Message ........... 231 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 180
Wheels Winter Driving ............................................. 327
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 422
Different Size ........................................... 420
Replacement ............................................ 422
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 68
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 276
Windows ..................................................... 120 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 299
Power ...................................................... 121
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 473
528

2007 Buick Rendezvous

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Buick Rendezvous

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Buick Rendezvous

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Buick Rendezvous Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7 Instrument Panel ....................................... 171

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

Split Bench Seats

5. To release the front latches, squeeze the

{CAUTION: Make sure that the seatback is in the folded

1. Squeeze the angled latch release bar toward

To recline the seatback, lift the recliner lever

2. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to

2. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.

5. Return the seatback to the upright position.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it

6. Raise the seatback to its upright position.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To move it down, push

After you move the height adjuster to where you

Right Front Passenger Position

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

1. Remove the shoulder belt from its stowage

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as

2. Attach the elastic cord to the comfort guide on

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

Every time infants and young children ride in

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with

To assist you in locating

Second Row — Captains Chairs

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the

Your vehicle’s key can be used for the ignition as

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

{CAUTION: • Your vehicle was damaged when

If you do not know if your garage door opener is a

Your vehicle may have a rear convenience center.

5. Lift the rear bin into the back of the vehicle.

2. Lift the bin into the back of the vehicle. Align

The hazard warning Other Warning Devices

To tilt the wheel, hold

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will

The airbag readiness light should flash for a few

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the